Home

1 - All Mobile Video

1. item number Item Seitable range Function 110 KEY INHIBIT The enabling or disabling of switches and buttons can be SWITCH independently specified through each of the following sub EFFECTIVE AREA items when item 109 is setto on Sub items 1 MON INPUT dis Specifies whether the INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons SEL ena onthe upper control panel are enabled or not dis INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons are disabled ena INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons are enabled 2 CONTROL dis Specifies which switches and buttons onthe control panel of PANEL edit this unit and the external control panel connected to this unit ena are enabled dis All switches and buttons are disabled edit The switches and buttons related to editing function are disabled ena All switches and buttons are enabled 111 VARIABLE SPEED off_ 1 to 2 Sets the the tape speed range during variable speed VAR LIMIT IN KEY on Oto 1 playback onthe control panel of this unit PANEL CONTROL off 1 to 2 The range of the tape speed is 1 to 2 times normal speed on Oto 1 The range of the tape speed is 0 to 1 time normal speed 112 CTLLOCK IN off CTLlocks the tape transport during variable speed playback VAR SHTL 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 2 0 orshuttle playback off CTL does notlock 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 2 0 CTL locks the tape tra
2. HOME menu Button Indication Function Settings F1 PB EE Selection of output signals PB EE F2 REC INH Disables recording off lt all crash REC video CTL audio CTL gt casst Note The casst indicator is only displayed when the record protect plug is set to prevent recording This setting cannot be selected F3 ASSEMBLE Selects edit mode and edit channel on off F4 INS TC F5 INS VIDEO F6 INS A CH1 F7 INS A CH2 F8 INS A CH3 F9 INS A CH4 F10 INS CUE ALT F1 PRE READ Setting for pre reading off video audio a v ALT E3 FREEZE Selects still picture output ALT F5 CAP LOCK Selects CAP LOCK capstan servo lock mode 2FD 4LOCK 4HOLD ALT F6 PREROLL Sets the preroll time 0to30s ALT F7 DMC Selects DMC playback ALT F10 LAST EDIT Restores the last edit point set Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 1 5 EE _ i ii sbulyjas nusy p saldeyo Nhl 4 2 HOME Menu 4 2 1 Selecting the Output Signals PB EE The audio video output signals from the line output and monitor output connectors can be temporarily changed from their current settings to another set of settings by pressing the PB EE button The video digital audio and analog cue channel output signals are toggled to the other set of settings while the button is pressed Output Signal Selection Output signal selection is made using the 017
3. ANALOG VIDEO OUTPUT REMOTE 1 IN 9P Set the analog audio input level and impedance using the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL 600Q termination switches as follows For line input with a 600Q termination HIGH and ON For high impedance line input HIGH n and OFF l Video monitor HD For high impedance microphone input monitor LOW and OFF 3 2 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 1 3 Making NTSC PAL Digital Connections This example shows how to connect two VTRs together using an HDW F500 as the players and a DVR 2100 D 1 Component Digital VTR as the recorder HDW F500 Player Input O ssk 2 A u u m m m OOOO0 OO D CONV SDI OUT OPTION D1 SDI OOO0O00 OO gt 2 ce pwd bod pod Pood Te th S o o REMOTE 1 IN D oO Z 6 COMPOSITE Q VIDEO OUTPUT 9 pin remote cable a REMOTE 1 SDI INPUT C a 1 8 o o OQO o Video monitor NTSC PAL monitor bits m ae C OP 660000 C O 660000 DVR 2100 Recorder For color frame editing using the HD
4. Memory card insertion slot Function buttons BALT button OMAINTENANCE switch ALARM indicator Lower control panel menu operations section Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 5 g ouoD pUe seg JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo NN 0UOD pue Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 19 deyo A 2 1 Control Panel Menu display Menus selected by pressing the menu buttons appear here Each menu shows the functions assigned to each function button F1 to F10 and information necessary for making settings such as time codes Menu buttons Press to activate the respective menu HOME button Activates the HOME menu Settings for basic or editing operations are made in the HOME menu TC button Activates the TC time code menu In the TC menu you can switch between LTC and VITC and between DF and NDF and make settings for time code displays on an external monitor CUE button Activates the CUE menu In the CUE menu you can register 10 cue points per page for a total of 100 cue points PF1 button Activates the PF Personal Function 1 menu In the PF1 menu you can register frequently used settings in other menus Settings for video input output signals are factory set PF2 button Activates the PF Personal Function 2 menu In the PF2 menu you can register frequently used settings in other menus Settings for audio input output
5. Positioning and setting edit points T Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 2 Rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to position the edit point For details on jog or shuttle playback refer to 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback on page 5 11 3 Press the IN or OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button The time data for the IN or OUT point appears in the menu display 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to set the remaining edit points Editing can begin when the points are set Chapter 6 Editing 6 3 Bupa 913 dey9 HAI 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Setting edit points with the numeric buttons 3 Press the SET button to set the input data 2 CLR biond 4 3 Setting edit points with the numeric buttons 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 2 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons For example to enter 01 HOOM30SOO0F press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s are set to 0 when you press the SET button PB EE CH COND HOME GREEN Entered data are PB PLAY LOCK oan SEU Ei displayed c O14 04m 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00
6. Removing slack in the tape Preventing double cassette inserting When a cassette is loaded an orange lock out bar appears in the cassette insertion slot to prevent users from attempting to load another cassette Ejecting the cassette Press the EJECT button The tape is unthreaded and the cassette is automatically ejected This operation takes a few seconds To cancel ejecting a cassette Press any operation button before the cassette is completely ejected The cassette is loaded again and the operation corresponding to the button you pressed starts 3 3 3 Preventing Accidental Erasure To prevent accidental erasure of material recorded on a tape push in the record protect plug L size cassette N 3 e TESS S size cassette Sp OS E Push in the record protect plug To restore the tape for recording return the plug to its original position Preventing accidental erasure When a cassette with this plug pushed in is inserted into the VTR the REC INHIBIT indicator on the lower control panel lights up and recording will not start even if you press the REC button To restore the tape for recording return the plug to its original position Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 9 HLA aul dn umes sajdeyD HK 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings The operating conditions of the VTR are set using the menu oper
7. When moisture condensation has occurred When this error message appears the VTR enters the protection mode and certain operations become inoperable Once the moisture has evaporated the error message disappears and the VTR becomes normal gt D 5 Q X Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on protection mode If ERROR 10 appears immediately after turning the VTR on Leave the VTR turned on and wait until the error message goes off Inserting a cassette is not possible while the message is on When the error message disappears you can use the VTR If you move the VTR from a cold to a warm location Leave the VTR turned off for about ten minutes since some time is needed for the condensation detection mechanism to work Appendix A 1 xlpueddy Specifications General Record format HDCAM Power requirements 100 to 240 V AC 10 50 60 Hz Power consumption 230 W Peak inrush current 1 Power ON current probe method 50 A 240 V 14 A 100V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 10 A 230V Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Humidity 25 to 80 relative humidity Mass 35 kg Dimensions 427 x 237 x 520 mm w h d 16 7 4 x 9 3 s x 20 1 2 inches Tape system 77 4 mm s with the frame frequency of 24
8. OOO O Ol Menu settings F1 TIMER SEL button in the TC menu Select the time data to be displayed F6 TCG SOURCE button in the TC menu int LTC int VITC ext LTC ext VITC see page 4 25 F7 TCG MODE button in the TC menu regene prst auto see page 4 25 Setting switches and menus 5 3 2 Adjusting the Audio To adjust the audio playback level Playback Level manually Pull and rotate the PB level control for the If the PB level controls on the upper control panel are corresponding channel pushed in audio signals are output at the factory set level 4 dBm output for signals recorded at the 0 dB reference level For details on changing the factory set reference output level refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual 19999 9 PB level controls To adjust the audio playback level manually 5 6 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 3 3 Selecting the HD SD Conversion Mode when HKDV 501A is installed When the optional HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board is installed in the HDW F500 the conversion mode can be selected with setting the VTR SETUP menu 754 DOWNCONVERTER MODE e Edge crop CROP One fourth of the HD screen on each side is cut off When 13 9 is selected Th
9. item number ltem Seitable range Function 120 WARNING off Selects whether warning messages should be displayed in DISPLAY on the lower part of the timecode display for the HOME menu the TC menu the PF1 menu and the PF2 menu off Do not display warning messages on Display warning messages Nowarning messages are displayed for the CUE menu so check by viewing amenu other than the CUE menu e If LOST LOCK occurs during playback or recording a LOST LOCK warning messageis always displayed 121 INFORMATION Selects items to be displayed in the operation information DISPLAY Sub items SYSTEM off off Does not display the field frequency of both the unit and FREQUENCY diff the tape ever diff Displays the field frequency of the unit and the tape only when they do not match ever Always displays the field frequency ofthe unit and the tape ACTIVE LINE HD _ off off Does notdisplay the effective scanning line number to diff be input or played back and to be output ever diff Displays the effective scanning line number to be input and to output only when they do not match ever Always displays the effective scanning line number to beinputand output EOS DISPLAY off off Does not display EOS on on Displays EOS VIDEO INT SG off off Does not display the type of the test signal generated by on the internal video test signal generator on Display the type of the test signal generated by the internal video test signal g
10. 1 Drop frame mode In order to compensate for differences between time code values from the time code generator and the actual time that occurs when the field frequency of this unit is 59 94 Hz the drop frame mode causes the time code generator to omit the first two frames frame 00 and 01 in each minute except the tenth Regenerated signals are selected using the 608 TCG UBG REGENE MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu To check the running of the internal time code generator Press the INPUT CHECK button 4 3 4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode RUN MODE Press the RUN MODE button to select the time code running mode free The time code advances when the power is on regardless of the VTR s operation mode rec The time code advances only during recording 4 3 5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode DF NDF Press the DF NDF button to select the running mode for the CTL counter and the time code generator DF Drop frame mode DF is displayed NDF Non drop frame mode NDF is displayed auto The unit switches to drop frame mode when the field frequency is 59 94 Hz and switches to non drop frame mode when the field frequency is 60 Hz Note e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz e When the TCG MODE button is set to regene the drop frame mode is inoperative since the time code generator is synchronized to the playback time code 2 Non dro
11. EDIT TITLE AGC DEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt 0 x SHR N A i HDID2CAM D BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL Ex IT es a Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 11 ai on ki WM sum s nu y p 4aydeup NHI 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings SN 888 vXlTr rod _ 4 Press the F7 SET LETTER button 4 1 7 Details on VTR Memory The selected letter is entered Bank and Memory Card Functions Most setting of most items can be stored toa VTR E memory bank or a memory card with the exception of AEE ERTE the settings described below 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 54 SH _ HDID2CAM Data that can be stored to recalled from a VTR 2 memory bank or a memory card SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL ERIT e Settings of items in the VTR SETUP menu with the es as exceptions listed below e Contents of the PF1 2 menus e VTR memory bank titles 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters Data that cannot be stored to recalled from a To enter a space VTR memory bank or a memory card Press the F5 SPACE button e Items related to the hours meter H01 to H14 Current settings are always maintained for these items If you enter a wrong character Press the F6
12. Setting the preroll time 1 Press the ALT button then the PREROLL TIME button A data entry window appears 2 Change the setting with the A and M buttons You may also use the and buttons 3 Press the PREROLL TIME button The data entry window disappears 4 2 8 Selecting DMC Playback DMC In DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback mode the VTR plays back a tape segment at a specified variable speed of 1 to 2 times normal playback speed memorizes the speed then plays the segment back at a later time at the memorized speed DMC playback is useful during on the spot telecasts of sporting events for immediate playback and broadcast of highlight scenes for which starting and ending points have been set during recording For detail on the procedure for DMC playback see Section 5 4 4 DMC Playback on page 5 14 During tape editing using two HDW F500 VTRs you can use DMC playback to control the playback speed of the player VTR for editing at variable speeds DMC editing For detail on the procedure for DMC editing see Section 6 2 1 Performing DMC Editing on page 6 15 4 2 9 Recalling Edit Points LAST EDIT While editing you can recall the last edit points by pressing the ALT button then the LAST EDIT button The edit points appear in the display CH COND HOME PB EE GREEN BASEBALL EDIT SET PB PLAY LOCK TCR 2FD F1 pea Ot 0
13. IN point OUT point the player VTR reroll w y Post roll n The PLAYER button lights up Recorder VTR 3 PresstheALT F DMO buttons in the HOME menu The button lights up and the VTR enters DMC editing mode Stop 4 Press the IN button while holding down the i gt i ii gt i i Playback DMC editing mode Playback ENTRY button to set an edit point mode mode Preroll time x IN point Post roll time x You cannot set an OUT point for the player VTR initial speed w ifinal speed fi 4 eaten or DMC editing SSS Player VTR i 1 Moves at the initial Playback at speeds Sto Speed storedin memory Moves at p i the final speed Tape movement during DMC editing Chapter 6 Editing 6 15 Bupa 9 sedeyo HA 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing 5 Press the STOP button The VTR enters STOP mode 6 Turn the search dial to set the initial speed The selected speed is displayed in the time data display T Press the PREVIEW REVIEW and PREROLL buttons at the same time The tape prerolls and the player VTR begins playing at the initial speed 8 When the Windicator appears with beep indicating that the IN point has been passed rotate the search dial to the desired playback speed s The varying playback speeds are stored in memory while the Windicator appears in the display 9 Press the STOP button If the W indic
14. T Press the F2 PDTIME SET key PRESET REMAIN T CH COND PDPSET MODE L_113min GREEN 24F TCR 00 00 00 00 PDTIME 1014 OO 30s OO 30F TC O01 OOm OOs OOF PDTC DF NOF Cau C e Once the time code is preset it cannot be reverted e Operation information display cannot be displayed while the pull down time code appears e The pull down time code cannot be displayed while the machine to machine editing display appears 4 3 9 Presetting for Conversion From 24 frame Into 25 frame Time Code TCCONV MEMU When the VTR is operated in 25PsF 50i mode follow the steps below to make the settings for 25 frame converted time code 3 fo oO 9 29 lt 00 gt 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears REMAIN T CH COND L_113min GREEN TC CONVERT TCR 00 00 00 00 24F STARTING TC O01 00m OOs QOF 24F JUMPING TC ev 214 On OOs OOF on ORG TC 24F CURRENT TC o O04 OOm OO OOF START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENT TC SEL CA 24F STARTING TC Time code used as a reference when converting 24 frame time code into 25 frame time code 24F JUMPING TC The loopback point for converting 24 frame
15. 5 Press the F1 ACTIVE LINE button to select the conversion mode Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035 1080 off off is used to activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback 1035 Convert the effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 1080 Convert the effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 6 Press the F9 EXEC A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display To cancel the execution Press the F8 CANCEL button T Press the F9 EXEC The HDW F500 is restarted automatically 8 Press the SET UP button The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display 9 Select the conversion mode in the VTR SETUP menu below e When 1035 is selected in the procedure 5 Select the conversion mode using the 730 ACTIVE LINE 1035 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu 1080 gt 1035 CONV Convert the effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 preserving the aspect ratio of the image EY ES 1080 gt 1035 CROP Convert the effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 The four sides of the image are cropped then it is horizontally expanded 1920 samples samples e When 1080 is selected in the procedure 5 Select the conversion mode using the 731 ACTIVE LINE 1080 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu 1035 gt 1080 CONV Convert the effective scanning line number fro
16. Automatic edit point setting Whether set manually or automatically all edit points can be changed or deleted at any time Automatic setting of OUT points When the fourth edit point OUT point is set the edit point data is activated and the invalid point is automatically deleted Automatically set edit point oun OUT point Recorder VTR VY v M IN point Player VTR gt IN point OUT point Fourth edit point Automatic setting of IN points When an IN point is corrected the OUT point is set automatically using the duration of the VTR whose edit points were not changed IN point OUT point Recorder VTR Y Y Player VTR E A A A A Ne IN point eh OUT point Corrected Automatically edit point set edit point Split editing Positioning and setting edit points Split editing allows you to set edit points separately for video and audio Set audio edit points with the AUDIO IN OUT buttons and video edit points with the IN OUT buttons Split editing however can only be done when the recorder VTR is in insert mode Positioning and setting edit points 1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME menu F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS A CH1 INS A CH2 INS A CH3 INS A CH4 INS CUE 2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER but
17. D CONV OUT OPTION SYNC connector BNC Outputs an NTSC external sync signal Notes e This is effective only when the optional HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board is installed e The phase is the same as the phase of the composite signal output from the COMPOSITE SUPER of D CONV OUT OPTION connector Because the output phase changes with the operation mode of the VTR use this to synchronize with the video monitor REF IN SD connectors BNC and 75 Q termination switch Inputs for a reference video signal NTSC or PAL of the selected field frequency Use a video signal with chroma burst VBS or a monochrome video signal VS A loop through connection is possible Set the 75 Q termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop through connection and set it to ON if you are not using a loop through connection REF IN HD connectors BNC and 75 Q termination switch Inputs for a reference video signal HD of the selected field frequency Use a trilevel SYNC signal for the external synchronization A loop through connection is possible Set the 75 Q termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop through connection and set it to ON if you are not using a loop through connection BREAKER button Primary circuit breaker for the AC power circuit AC IN connector and connector Connects to an AC outlet using the power cord supplied with the VTR AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors BNC Inputs for d
18. BASEBALL c 1 Preset 47 FOOTBALL 8 Preset Eg Preset EDIT TITLE C DIREC tion COPY EXIT ee ee 3 Press the DIRECTION button or press the or buttons twice to select the lt direction 4 Press the Al or M button to move the cursor P to the number of the VTR memory bank to be recalled 5 Press the COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display To cancel the recalling operation Press the CLR button Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 5 i i ee MN sum s nusy p 4ay deup HN 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 6 Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The menu settings are recalled from the selected VTR memory bank When the recalling process has been completed the title of the VTR bank appears under CURRENT SETUP in the display CH COND UTR BANK FOOTBALL TCR 00 00 00 00 UTR BANK UTR_ BANK UNDO CURRENT SETUP SETUP BANK BASEBALL ic 1 Preset L 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 FOOTBALL 8 Preset f Preset amp EDIT DIREC TITLE TION COPY EXIT ce Ee T Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again 4 1 5 Memory Card Function You can store menu settings in the VTR memory banks and cue point data to an memory card for recall later The MEMORY
19. Note When the TIMER SEL button in the TC menu is set to CTL cuing up is slightly slower than in TC mode This is to maintain the accuracy of the CTL signals You can set up the VTR so that priority is placed on cuing accuracy or speed Change the VTR setting through 403 CUEUP BY TC and 404 CUEUP BY CTL in the VTR SETUP menu Changing the preroll time The preroll time is factory set to 5 seconds but can be set to any time between 0 and 30 seconds in 1 second steps For details see Section 4 2 7 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME on page 4 18 When changing the preroll time set it so that the recorded section prior to the edit start point is longer than the preroll time The preroll time used in automatic editing is the preroll time set for the recorder 6 1 8 Previewing Follow the procedure below to preview the edit AUTO button PREVIEW REVIEW button PREROLL button STOP button Previewing To preview the edit press the AUTO button to switch to AUTO mode then press the PREVIEW REVIEW button During previewing the PREVIEW REVIEW button lights up After previewing correct the edit points as required then do the preview again For details on modifying edit points refer to 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points on page 6 10 To stop previewing Press the STOP button The tape stops immediately To rewind the tape to the preroll point Press the PREROLL button
20. Video source Digital video input Video switcher o 0 00E D OLOS O K o o oo CO e Le 06666 60 55 sian 66006l60 f input Audio source Preread editing 6 18 Chapter 6 Editing In preread editing if an input video signal is used as the reference signal for the output video signal oscillation may occur because of loop connections To avoid this select the external reference signal for preread editing by setting the item 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select in the VTR SETUP menu to external e When preread mode is selected shifting of the VTR to E E mode is disabled in all operation modes to prevent oscillation caused by loop connections If preread mode is deselected while a loop between the input and output of the same channel exists E E signals are output and oscillation occurs To prevent oscillation do the procedure below to select PB mode for both the video and digital audio channels before the start of preread editing 1 Press the ALT PREREAD buttons inthe HOME menu and select video audio or a v Make the required connections for preread editing Perform preread editing after selecting the insert editing mode After preread editing undo all the connections used for the preread editing Press the ALT button and then press PRE REA
21. AUDIO OUTPUT AES EBU connectors HD SDI INPUT connectors D HD SDI OUTPUT connectors SDTI OPTION IN connector SDTI OPTION OUT connector AUDIO INPUT LEVEL 600 termination switches AUDIO INPUT connectors AUDIO OUTPUT connectors CONTROL PANEL connector REMOTE1 IN 9P OUT 9P connectors MONITOR OUTPUT connectors VIDEO CONTROL connector RS 232C connector PARALLEL I O 50P connector D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connectors PULL DOWN OUT OPTION connector TIME CODE OUT connector TIME CODE IN connector Connector panel Note For the AUDIO INPUT CH1 2 3 4 CUE connectors AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 2 3 4 CUE connectors as well as the TIME CODE IN OUT XLR 3 pins 2 1 4 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls connectors the type male or female of input output connectors used overseas are opposite of those used in Japan To use this unit with audio equipment outside of Japan you must use male female adapters D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector BNC Outputs an analog composite signal for a video monitor When the ALT CHARA SUPER setting in the TC menu is on character signals such as time codes are superimposed on the output This connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board is installed
22. INS TC Loft INS INS INS INS INS INS UIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off 4 2 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 2 Press the ALT button The second page of the HOME menu appears in the display PRE REMAIN T CH COND READ L _113min GREEN PLAY LOCK TCR NDF 2FD F1 O14 04m 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 FREEZE IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 ALT HOME L__ CAP PRE STOP LAST Lock RoLL DMC cope EDIT 2FD 5Ssec off To return to the first page Press the ALT button again 3 Press the CAP LOCK button to change the capstan servo lock mode setting Each time the button is pressed the setting changes Changing menu settings using the cursor control buttons You may also use the cursor control buttons to select menu items and change menu settings by moving the on screen cursor For settings which cannot be made by the function buttons alone the following icons appear in the bottom right of the menu to indicate the use of the cursor control buttons lt gt All cursor control buttons 42 Cursor control buttons for horizontal direction Cursor control buttons for vertical direction In addition to operations using the cursor control buttons some menus allow you to change a value by using the buttons 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF1 2 Menus
23. SDTI OPTION IN connector 2 15 SDTI OPTION OUT connector 2 15 Search dial 2 12 Selecting audio input signals 5 2 audio signals to be monitored 5 2 capstan servo lock mode 4 18 CTL display 4 21 CTL display mode 4 26 conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 5 8 drop frame mode 4 25 edit mode 4 17 HD SD conversion mode 5 7 input video signal 4 56 monitor output signal 4 60 multi cue mode 4 36 non audio data as the audio input signal 5 3 output signals 4 16 output signals for the TIME CODE OUT terminal 4 17 reference signal 4 56 remote operation mode 4 62 time code and user bits to be recorded 4 22 SERVO indicator 2 10 SET button 2 8 SET UP menu 4 59 SFT button 2 8 SHUTTLE button 2 11 Shuttle mode playback 5 12 Slow motion playback improving vertical resolution 5 9 Split editing 6 5 STANDBY button 2 9 STOP button 2 10 Super imposition of character information 4 28 System set up panel 2 13 T TC menu 4 20 Tele File 1 2 4 41 TELE FILE menu 4 41 Time code conversion in the 24F mode 4 34 conversion in the 25F mode 4 29 presetting for conversion from 24 frame to 25 frame time code 4 27 presetting for conversion from 25 frame to 24 frame time code 4 33 running mode 4 25 Time code generator TCG 4 25 setting 4 25 TIME CODE IN connector 2 17 TIME CODE OUT connector 2 17 Time code reader TCR 4 24 Time data resetting 4 24 selecting the time data display 4 21 setting 4 21 U Upper contr
24. To rewind the tape to the edit point Press the PREROLL button together with the button corresponding to the edit point Chapter 6 Editing 6 9 Bupa 9 seideyo HAI 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Monitoring signals during previewing During previewing you can monitor the following video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the recorder VTR e Between preroll and IN points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored e Between IN and OUT points Playback signal of the player VTR can be monitored in E E mode e Between OUT and post roll points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored This may be illustrated as shown below IN point OUT point Vv v PB EE PB player VTR recorder VTR recorder VTR 6 10 Chapter6 Editing 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points If an edit point is incorrectly set for example if an OUT point is located before an IN point or the length of an edit section is different for the recorder and player VTRs the time data for the incorrectly set edit point flash indicating that the VTR cannot perform editing or previewing In this case delete the edit point then set a new one correctly You can also move an edit point position in one frame units Deleting edit points Deleting edit points T Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR on which to perform the edit point deletion The button
25. 4 4 3 Erasing Cue Point Data To erase any cue point data blank out the data entry wi ndow then do the cue point registration procedure 2 4 QO OO 08 9 aop QO OO oil 1 2 Erasing cue point data Press the ALT button then the PAGE MODE button or the EXTEND MODE button If you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button Press the A or M button to move the cursor P to the cue number to be erased PREU REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min TCR 00 00 00 00 LI AM CUE TITLE 1 NEXT PAGE PEGE u 3 4 5 6 TELE FILE j CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR 4 38 Chapter 4 Menu Settings PREU REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min EOS 00 00 00 00 TCR 00 00 00 00 I AM CUE TITLE 1 NEXT PAGE 0 PAGE 00 01 10 00 C i 00 02 10 00 3 ne i 1 3 1 5 10 TELE i 4 ELLE 9 2 210 C 210 CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button 4 Press the CLR bu
26. DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT CJAC l 3 Press the K or l button to select a character To change Comment data I COMMENT EDIT A JCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789 1 lt gt 0 x SU4R _ HD1ID2CAM BACK SET SAVE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT R E fol oln 0 8 8 lt 00 gt o 4 Press the F7 SET LETTER button or the center cursor button The selected character is entered Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the comment to be changed COMMENT EDIT BE AGICDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUWXYZ abcdefshijiklmnoparstuvuxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 55 SHA R AL7 wd HD1D2CAM SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL EXIT CAC dit Lit Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 51 d i NN sbulyjas nuay p saldeyo NMI 4 4 CUE Menu 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters Up to 80 characters can be entered If excessive comment data are entered the input of cue point data may become disabled To prevent this press the TAPE INFO button to check the available memory To enter a space Press the F5 SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the F6 BACK SP
27. N Modify the edit points For details on modifying edit points see Section 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points on page 6 10 3 Press the REC EDIT button The VTR performs automatic editing 6 14 Chapter 6 Editing 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing This section describes the following advanced editing Setting edit points and playback speed methods e DMC editing e Animation editing e Preread editing Use the procedure below to set edit points and playback speeds for DMC editing 6 2 1 Performing DMC Editing If your player VTR has DT Dynamic Tracking capability you can perform variable speed editing by controlling the playback speed from the lower control panel This type of editing is called DMC editing Overview of DMC editing s o Setting edit points and playback speed Requirements for DMC editing e DMC editing may be done during assemble or insert 1 Pressthe ASSEMBLE button in the HOME editing but not during split editing menu or press the respective INSERT button F4 e The player VTR must support DT playback INS TO B INS VIDEO Fa INS A CH1 T ina DM a INS A CH2 8 INS A CH3 INS ape movement during C editing A CH4 or INS CUE button to select the During DMC editing the tape moves as shown in the edit mode that you want diagram below 2 Press the PLAYER button to set the VTR to act as
28. PLAY LOCK Playback mode servo locked PLY SPD Speed shift from Capstan override mode normal speed REC Record mode servo unlocked REC LOCK Record mode servo locked EDIT Edit mode servo unlocked o EDIT LOCK Edit mode servo locked E JOG STILL Still picture jog mode N JOG FWD Forward jog gt is lit JOG REV Reverse jog lt is lit E SHUTTLE speed Shuttle mode VAR speed Variable mode G DMC speed DMC memorize mode D PREV speed DMC edit preview mode DMC EDIT DMC edit mode DMC SPD speed DMC initial speed setting PREVIEW Preview mode AUTO EDIT Auto edit mode REVIEW Review mode a Initial speed or memorized speed To display a warning message For details about the warning messages see Warning Messages on page A 10 The first 16 characters of the warning message When there are multiple warning messages each message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next message When there is no warning message the items set in 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select in the VTR SETUP menu flashes on the second line instead Set 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select in the VTR SETUP menu to any setting other than time data only and set 627 CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at dual line mode in the VTR SETUP menu to on The first 16 characters of the warning message flashes on the second line 4 31 Chapter 4 Menu Settings sbullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu To dis
29. TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT Cb e Cj a JO O00 9 9 9 O Od OO 6391 4 5 00 0000 00000 jae 0000 Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to a memory card 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display You can access the MEMORY CARD menu directly by pressing the ACCESS button To store the current VTR menu settings Move the cursor P to the C CURRENT SETUP position To store all VTR memory banks Press the SELECT ALL button Move the cursor to the MEMORY CARD side using the gt button and use the A and M buttons to move the cursor gt to the bank number MEMORY CARD side where the data is to be saved FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANK4 Ka SETUP BANK 2 BASEBALL 0 FOOTBALL C Preset 1 1 Preset SHOW Preset 2 2 TENNIS SETUP Prese 3 Preset VTR memory Preset 4 4 Preset Prese 5 Preset bank number snau Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset El E Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL TION COPY EXIT EER E FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD FOOTBALL TCR 00 00 00 00 UNDO CARD
30. during auto edit mode TC amp UB The time code signal and user bits signal are both regenerated TC The time code signal is regenerated UB The user bits signal is regenerated 609 REC RUN FREE RUN select free run rec run This selects the way in which the time code advances free run Regardless of the operating mode of this unit the time code advances all the time that the power is on rec run The time code advances only during recording When using this setting set item 606 to preset 610 VITC SD off on Selects whether or not to insert VITC data in the HD SD converter output off VITC data is inserted on VITC data is not inserted 611 VITC POSITION 1 select NTSC 12 line 16 line 20 line When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is installed and 29 97PsF 59 94i mode is selected on the VTR this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20 Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 612 VITC POSITION 2 select NTSC 12 line 18 line 20 line When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is installed and 29 97PsF 59 94i mode is selected on the VTR this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20 Items 611 and 612 allow VITC
31. 100 4000H video signal 141 3 5A70H 759 VIDEO OUTPUT 0 0 OH Adjusts the video level of the D2 video signal output from D LEVEL D2 CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector and analog composite preset 100 100 4000H video signal output from D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE 4000H f SUPER connector 141 3 5A70H A 36 Appendix Item number ltem Seitable range Function 760 CHROMALEVEL 0 0 OH Adjusts the chroma level of the D2 video signal output from D2 i D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector and analog preset 100 100 4000H composite video signal output from D CONV OUT 4000H OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 141 3 5A70H 761 HUE D2 30 Adjusts the hue of the D2 video signal output from D CONV preset 0 SDI OUT OPTION connector and analog composite video 0 signal output from D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 30 762 SETUP LEVEL 0 0 Adjusts the setup level of the D2 video signal output from D D2 i CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector and analog preset 7 5IRE 75 composite video signal output from D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 10 0 763 SYNC PHASE SD 128 Adjusts the sync phase of the D1 D2 video signal output preset 0 from D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connectors and analog 0 composite video signal output from D CONV OUT OPTION
32. 2 times normal speed when rotated clockwise The dial clicks at the positions of still picture and normal playback speed Capstan override mode Rotating the dial while holding down the PLAY button changes the playback speed by up to 15 After turning the power on always set the search dial at the center position where the W indicator lights up 2 1 2 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 2 System Set Up Panel Lift the lower control panel up to its horizontal position to access the system set up panel Lower control panel Accessing the system set up panel CONTROL PANEL EXT P INT this VTR panel CONTROL PANEL switch Selects which control panel controls this VTR INT Control is by the control panel attached to EXT Control is remote by connection to the CONTROL PANEL connector on the rear The switch is factory set to INT System set up panel Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 1 3 s O1U0D pue Sed jo SUORDUN pue suogeoog z sejdeyy NN S 01 U09 puke syed Jo SUOROUN4 pue suoneoog z Jaydeyp 2 3 Connector Panel D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector D CONV OUT OPTION SYNC connector REF IN SD connectors and 75 Q termination switch REF IN HD connectors and 75 Q termination switch BREAKER button O AC IN connector and ground connector B AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors
33. 22 00 00 01 21 52 30 01 Non consecutive JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 22 52 30 00 Pat 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 3 If necessary use the function buttons to change the settings For details on the settings made by these buttons see the table below TC CONVERT menu REMAIN T CH COND TC CONVERT L 113min GREEN TCR 00 00 00 00 25F STARTING TC O01 00m OOs QOF 25F JUMPING TC 214 00n OOs OOF ORG TC 25F CURRENT TC g O04 OOm OOs OOF START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENT TC SEL C A A Button indication Function F3 TC CONV Specifies whether the time code is converted to 24 frame time code or not F4 ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 25 frame time code is displayed or not on two lines in the HOME TC and PF menus along with the converted time code 25F STARTING TC Time code used as a reference when converting 25 frame time code into 24 frame time code 25F JUMPING TC The loopback point for converting 25 frame time code to 24 frame time code with 25F STARTING TC as the reference and the conversion done in both forward and reverse directions Note that the part of the 24 frame time code before 25F JUMPING TC is not consecutive with the part after 25F JUMPING
34. AES EBU BNC 2 2 loop through CH1 2 and CH3 4 AES EBU format unbalanced AUDIO INPUT XLR 3 pin female 5 CH1 2 3 4 and CUE LOW OFF 60 dBu high impedance balanced HIGH OFF 4 dBu high impedance balanced HIGH ON 4 dBm 600 Q termination balanced TIME CODE IN XLR 3 pin female 1 0 5 to 18 Vp p 10 KQ balanced gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world If using this unit with non Japanese specification equipment use male female adaptors Appendix A 3 xipueddy Specifications Output connectors HD SDI OUTPUT BNC 4 MONITOR with superimposed text 1 2 3 and MONITOR SDI 1 485 Gbps conforms to SMPTE 292M BTA S004B D CONV SDI OUT OPTION when the optional HKDV 501A is installed D1 D2 switchable BNC 3 3 SUPER with superimposed text 1 2 and 3 SUPER D1 SDI 270 Mbps conforms to SMPTE 259M CCIR 656 HI D2 SDI 143 Mbps conforms to SMPTE 259M CCIR 656 HI D CONV OUT OPTION when the optional HKDV S501A is installed BNC 2 COMPOSITE SUPER with superimposed text COMPOSITE SUPER 1 0 Vp p 75 Q sync negative Black burst 0 286 Vp p 75 Q sync negative SDTI OPTION OUT when the optional HKDV 506A is installed BNC 1 SDTI 270 Mbps PULL DOWN OUT OPTION when the optional HKD V 507 507D is installed BNC 2 with superimposed text SYNC The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1 2 3 4
35. CUE POINT SETI CURRENT CUESET Co a TENNIS an E Blank SHOW Blank 3 SETUP Blank 4 Blank 5 Blank 6 SHOW Blank 7 CUESET Blank 8 amp EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE aLL Tron COPY EXIT LCCC 236 7 i Oo OO 2 0 mj m ooo Oo 00 0000 o QO QO QO QO QO Co 8491 5 To return to the MEMORY CARD menu Press the F3 SHOW SETUP button 4 Press the F8 button or press the lt or gt buttons twice to select the lt direction 5 Press the Al or M button to move the cursor P to the number of the memory bank in the memory card where you want to store the cue point list Storing cue point lists to an IC memory card 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 4 8 Chapter 4 Menu Settings FORMAT MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS L TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD UTR BANK UNDO CUE POINT SETI CURRENT CUESET Bank number in Y_ Blank 1 TENNIS the memory card tote E H7 th hank SHOW ank 3 SETUP Blank 4 Blank 5 Blank 6 SHOU Blank 7 CUESET Blank 8 EZI e EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT 6 Press the COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display T Press the COPY button while holding down the S
36. Items related to operation panels 201 Items related to remote interface 301 Items related to editing 401 Items related to prerolling 501 Items related to recording protection 601 Items related to the time code generator 701 Items related to the video control 801 Items related to the audio control 901 Items related to digital process A01 Items related to pull down control T01 Other Pressing the PREV CATEG button selects the first item of the previous category Pressing the NEXT CATEG button selects the first item of the next category Changing settings 5 1 olo 0 990 o u 00 j OO Dig BEES Changing settings 1 Press the Alor Mbutton to move the cursor P to the item to be changed 4 64 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 2 Press the F7 CHANGE DATA button The window for changing settings appears UTR CONTROL PRE READ off CHANGE SAVE DATA EXIT 3 Press the CHANGE DATA button or the A or Mbutton repeatedly to select the new setting When sub items appear change the setting as required with the Alor Mbutton then press the CHANGE DATA button repeatedly 4 Press the SAVE EXIT button The new value is set and the window for changing settings disappears 5 Repeat S
37. Menu List Item number 606 Item TCG MODE select Settable range preset regene auto Function Selects the time code to which the internal time code generator synchronizes preset By an operation on the front panel or by remote control from a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P connector the initial value of the time code generated by the internal time code generator can be preset regene The internal time code generator is synchronized regene to the time code values read by the internal time code generator auto Operates in regene mode when either assemble or insert mode is selected and operates in preset mode when any other mode is selected 607 TCG REGENE SOURCE select int LTC int VITC ext LTC ext VITC If item 606 is set to regene this selects the source of the synchronization of the time code generated internally int LTC When the time code played back from the time code track on the tape is used int VITC When the time code played back from the AUX data in the video signal on the tape is used ext LTC When the external time code input to the TIME CODE IN connector is used ext VITC When the external time code input to the HD SDI INPUT connector is used 608 TCG UBG REGENE MODE TC amp UB TC UB Selects the regenerate signal when the time code generator is in regenerate mode when item 606 is set to regene or
38. Press to light the button up then press one of the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons to select the type and the channel of the audio signal HD SDI CH 1 to CH 4 Selects the input signal from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI OPTION IN connector AES EBU CH 1 to CH 4 Selects signal input to the AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors ANALOG CH 1 to CH 4 Selects signal input to the AUDIO INPUT connectors The INPUT SELECT button will flash if there is no incoming signal and HD SDI or AES EBU is selected This setting can also be done with setting the VTR SETUP menu 802 805 AUDIO INPUT select CH1 CH4 Notes e When the signal input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector is selected for the input video signal the signal input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector is automatically selected for the input audio signal as well e When the audio signal input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector is selected for the input audio signal only the INPUT SELECT button lights For details refer to 4 6 1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal on page 4 58 AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons Select the audio input signal when the INPUT SELECT button is lit or the audio signal to be monitored when the MONITOR SELECT button is lit 2 4 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls REF SYNC reference signal indicators These indicate the signal selected as the reference signal If there is no reference signal input to the selected connecto
39. The VTR is using an internal reference signal LOST LOCK Capstan servo lock was lost during playback recording or editing NO EXTERNAL SD REFERENCE ON PD When item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to lock1 or lock2 no external SD reference signal is input only when the HKDV 507D is installed HD amp SD REF ASYNCHRONOUS When item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to lock1 or lock2 HD reference signal and external SD reference signal are not synchronized only when the HKDV 507D is installed NO SDI INPUT A SDI input signal cannot be detected NO SDI AUDIO INPUT No audio data detected in the SDI input signal VITC NOT READ VITC cannot be correctly read from the tape AUDIO PLL UNLOCKED Audio lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal NO PB RF SIGNAL Playback heads cannot correctly read digital data from the tape INCONSISTENT EMPHASIS Emphasis information on the tape is inconsistent with the system emphasis status INCONSISTENT FORMAT OF META DATA The meta data being input and the meta data recorded on the tape have different formats PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE The cassette is ejected automatically in line with the setting of item 018 AUTO EJECT LEVEL in the VTR SETUP menu because the system frequency of the VTR and the frequency of the signal recorded on the tape do not match NO A1 A2 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on c
40. The cassette is not ejected LEVEL1 The cassette is ejected when the audio signal on the tape is not compatible with this VTR For details on audio signal compatibility refer tothe compatibility table in 1 8 1 Switching the System Frequency inthe supplied maintenance manual LEVEL2 The cassette is ejected when the signal on the tape is not compatible with this VTR However ifthe difference between the audio signal andthe VTR field frequency is 0 1 the tape is assumed to be compatible LEVEL3 The cassette is ejected when the field frequency PsF mode or interlace mode of the tape differs from that ofthe VTR A 19 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Items Related to Operation Panels 101 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number Item Settable range Function 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE dial direct via search key Determines how the unit is set to search mode dial direct The unit enters search mode when you rotate the search dial in all modes except recording and edit modes via search key The unit enters search mode when you press the SHUTTLE JOG or VAR button 102 REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM on Specifies where or notto display a warning when audio video reference signal selected in item 005 is not presentor out of phase with the input video signal off No warning is displayed on Warningis displayed by flas
41. You can register up to 40 items to the PF Personal Function 1 2 menus including items that are displayed when the ALT button is pressed The registration of items from different menus to the PF1 2 menus eliminates the need for changing menus in order to change a given VTR operating condition For details on the factory set PF 1 2 menus see Section 4 5 PFI Menu Factory Settings on page 4 53 and 4 6 PF2 Menu Factory Settings on page 4 57 Registering items to the PF1 2 menus ooo Olaga NO OO 2 8 9 Oooo g eee og a ogg 00e co Ol 6 81 Registering items to the PF1 2 menus 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the F4 PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN button The PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu appears in the display 3 Press the F1 F2 F3 or F4 button to select the PF menu where you wish to register an item The selected PF menu appears and the items currently registered to the menu appear at the left of the display 4 Press the Al or M button to move the cursor P to the function button where the item is to be registered The selected function button is highlighted and the current setting is displayed REMAIN T CH COND PFI fL 113min TCR 00 00 00 00 PEIE SETUP ITEM 755 756 Y LEVEL DI 757 B Y LUL DI 758 R Y LUL DI PF ASSIGN Current se
42. channel CH 1 through 805 AUDIO INPUT select CH 4 5 2 Chapter 5 Recording Playback Note If item 701 VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP menu is set to SDTI the audio input signal on the SDTI OPTION IN connector will automatically be used as the input audio signal and AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons become unlit The SDTI setting is operative only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Board is installed Selecting audio signals to be monitored Press the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select the audio signals output to the PHONES jack and the MONITOR OUTPUT L and R connectors Selecting audio signals to be monitored 1 Press the MONITOR SELECT button so that it lights up The AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT button s light s up to indicate the audio input signal type and the channel s being monitored 2 Press the button s for the audio signal and the channel s to be output to the PHONES jack and the MONITOR OUTPUT L and or R connector s This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP menu using items 807 AUDIO MONITOR L select and 808 AUDIO MONITOR R select To adjust the audio output level of the PHONES jack Rotate the PHONES level control on the upper control panel To adjust the audio output level of the MONITOR OUTPUT connectors You can make an initial settings to allow the audio output leve
43. der EG Kommission Die Erf llung dieser Direktiven bedeutet Konformit t f r die folgenden Europ ischen Normen e EN60065 Produktsicherheit e EN55103 1 Elektromagnetische Interferenz Emission e EN55103 2 Elektromagnetische Empfindlichkeit Immunit t Dieses Produkt ist f r den Einsatz unter die folgende elektromagnetische Bedingung ausgelegt E4 kontrollierter EMV Bereich z B Fernsehstudio LELI o m Gre al alt 1 1 FGA ure vcccsccssseiesosnssssasssscevsonsstbvsssetessedsvessessccsessncs sOsnnsseessosetssensssenases 1 1 rata 1 1 1 Features of the HDW F500 ccc ccccscceesseceeneeeeenesseeenenes 1 1 1 1 2 Features of the Control Panel 20 00 eccccccssceeeesteeeeeseeeenees 1 3 1 2 Optional Accessories sesoesosssesocseseoesocssssossossoesocsosesesosssssossosssssose 1 5 Chapter 2 2 F Control Panel iscscccecdtscieessscudesisoods sonsebeestcececVeccevoadsoasendssasseesteecsvondstes 2 1 Locations and Functions 2 1 1 Upper Control Panel sesonneeeeeeeesnnnacesetennnansccecs seesseeeecenneeesennaes 2 2 of Parts and Controls 2 1 2 Lower Control Panel Menu Operations Section EEES 2 5 2 1 3 Lower Control Panel Editing Operations Section 2 7 2 1 4 Lower Control Panel Tape Transport Operations Section 2 9 2 1 5 Lower Control Panel Search Operations Section 2 11 2 2 System Set Up Panel ccssssssssssscsosssosssorssensseessescsosssosssonssensoes 2
44. tape speed reel capstan The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed drops to slow the pinch turns ON When this unit is controlled by an editor BVE 2000 BVE 9100 etc and the seting is reel capstan cue up operations are done at high speed Select capstan only when editing precision has priority 405 CUE MENU DEFAULT MODE select page mode extend mode Selects the default mode when the CUE menu is opened page mode PAGE mode extend mode EXTEND mode 406 CUE MENU PREROLL OFFSET O sec 30 sec Sets the preroll time for a cueing up operation from the CUE menu 407 AUTO REWIND off on Selects the rewind mode for the end of the tape off The tape transport stops at the end of the tape on The tape is automatically rewound from the end of the tape A 27 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Items Related to Recording Protection 501 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number Item Settable range Function 501 STILL TIMER 0 5 sec Select the amount of time after which the VTR to 5 sec automatically enters tape protect mode for the purpose of 10 sec protecting the video head and tape 20 sec This is the time between stopping of the tape stop mode or 30 se
45. to be recorded Use the TCG SOURCE TCG MODE DF NDF and VITC buttons in the TC menu to specify the time code and the user bits to be recorded The specifications for the various button settings are shown in the following table F10 VITC E7 TCG MODE F TCG SOURCE Fo DF NDF Time code and user bits recorded VIN Records the time code and the user bits input from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI OPTION IN connector to the video signal AUX data area The time code value generated by the time code generator specified by the F6 and F7 buttons and the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are recorded longitudinally on the tape TCG prst DF NDF auto The time code value generated by the time code generator and the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are recorded Any time code can be specified for the time code generator and the user bits generator The running mode for the recorded time code data conforms to that specified by the F9 button regene int LTC The time code value generated by the time code generator and the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data recorded longitudinally on the tape int VITC The time code value generated by the time code generator and the user bits value generated b
46. 0 FOOTBALL Cc Preset 1 1 Preset SHOW Preset 2 2 TENNIS SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset i TENNIS 4 4 Preset C Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset LC E Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT Cb E j j FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 L MEMORY CARD a LVYTR BANK UNDO CARD BANK4 SETUP BANK 2 BASEBALL 0 FOOTBALL Preset 1 1_ Preset SHou Preset 2 SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset TENNIS 4 4 Preset Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset LC E g Preset amp EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT LL ibe jb jb Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Press ALT F2 PROTECT buttons and a symbol will appear to the right of the memory card bank number 9 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before you pressed the ACCESS button appears again 3 Press the F4 SHOW CUESET button The display for storing cue point lists appears Storing cue point lists to a memory card You can store up to 8 pages of cue point lists to a memory card along with titles FORMAT MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR BANK UNDO
47. 4 CUE Menu 4 4 1 Selecting a Multi Cue Mode The HDW F500 has the following two multi cue modes PAGE mode Press the ALT button then the PAGE MODE button In PAGE mode cue point data can be accessed by page number thus speeding up cue point registration and cuing operations Display Cue points are displayed in groups of 10 number 0 to 9 10 to 19 etc Each display is a page Selecting a page There are the three following ways to select a page e Press the F1 PREV PAGE button The previous page is shown e Press the F2 NEXT PAGE button The next page is shown e Enter the desired page number with the numeric button then press the PAGE SET button If you enter 1 for example page one appears containing cue point numbers 10 to 19 EXTEND mode Press the ALT button then the EXTEND MODE button In EXTEND mode you can do operations that cannot be done in page units such as the consecutive registration of more than 10 cue points Display The screen displays a list of 100 consecutive cue points which can be scrolled Press the A or M button to scroll the list Page columns are not displayed To quickly scroll through a list Press the A or M button while holding down the SFT button 4 36 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 4 2 Registering Cue Points There are two ways to register cue points 1 by direct registration of the tape address when the ENTRY button
48. 5 1 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals cece ceeesseeeseeeseceseceeceeeseneeaes 5 2 5 1 3 Adjusting the Audio Recording Level ee eeeeeeeeereeeeee 5 3 5 1 4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio Signals Being Recorded 00 0 ee eeeeceeseeeneecseeseceeeeeeeeeaeesnaees 5 4 5 1 5 Recording Analog Audio cee ceeceeeeseeeseeeneeeseceeceseeeneeeaes 5 4 S22 Recording s cescsssscacssosccesncsensicncvasssnsedescsssisoseecensessenseesecdesssdensestecssess 5 5 5 3 Preparing for Playback csscssscsssscssssscsssccsssccssssssssscsssecsssseees 5 6 5 3 1 Setting Switches and Menus sce eeeeeseeeseeereeeteceeeeeseeeees 5 6 5 3 2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level eee eeeeseceseeeteeeeee 5 6 5 3 3 Selecting the HD SD Conversion Mode when HKDV S01A is installed eee ecccseceesseeeeeeteeeeees 5 7 5 3 4 Selecting the Conversion Mode of the Effective Scanning Line Number when HKDV 502 is installed 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 5 3 5 Improving the Vertical Resolution during Slow Motion Playback when HKDV 502 is installed 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeee 5 9 5 4 Playback ccisccecsascasecssessesstsssnsssesessececeduscasecvoseccesssnsssuansessecnsedsssncseeceess 5 11 5 4 1 Normal Speed Playback ssesseeeseeesseeesererssreserrresersrsrrssee 5 11 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback eee ee eeeecseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 5 11 5 4 3 Capstan Override Playback 000 ceececescesseceeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 5 14 5 4 4 DMC P
49. BACK SPACE to go back then reenter a character To cancel the procedure to start again Press F9 CANCEL button to start over To change a character Press the lt button to the move the cursor to the title box the press the A or M buttons to move the text insertion position 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The entered title is set and the menu displayed before you pressed the EDIT TITLE button appears again 4 1 2 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 1 8 Memory Card Data Compatibility Data copied onto a memory card can be used on control panels connected to other HDW F500 VTRs Although data is completely compatible between VTRs with different optional equipment take note of the following Consider data copied from VTR A to VIRB and then to VTR C VTRA 701 VIDEO INPUT select setting SDTI Internal VTR processing SDTI VTRB 701 VIDEO INPUT select setting SDTI Internal VTR processing SDI VTRC HKDV 506A SDTI Board installed 701 VIDEO INPUT select setting SDTI Internal VTR processing SDTI HKDV 506A SDTI Board installed t Memory card Copy HKDV 506A SDTI Board NOT installed D E e Even though the opt
50. BANKO CURRENT SETUP yg FOOTBALL Preset 1 1 Preset SHOW Preset 2 2 TENNIS SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset C E Preset amp EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT CACC CC 3 Press the DIRECTION button or press the or gt buttons twice to select the lt direction To change the title of the bank press the EDIT TITLE button For details refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 Press the COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 7 sBunjes nueyy p Jeldeyo 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings eS O U oS 8 Press the COPY button while holding down 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button sum s nusy p 4ay deup HN the SFT button The control panel stores the specified VTR memory bank to the IC memory card After the storage is complete the title of the VTR memory bank appears under the MEMORY CARD The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly from any menu screen by pressing the ACCESS button indication FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD amp UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANK4 SETUP BANK 2 BASEBALL
51. BLE IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 PLAYER ms O14 04n 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 off IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off gt ollo mit a 1 i en o E To delete entered data Press the CLR button 6 4 Cnhapter6 Editing SET is displayed CH CON HOME PB EE Baas PB PLAY LOCK TCR 2FD F1 014 04m 58s 00 rF H M S F AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 ASSEM IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 PLAYER ms O14 04 58s OOF TC AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 off IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off E 4 Press the IN or OUT button The time data for the IN or OUT point appears in the menu display About automatic edit point setting Editing requires a total of four edit points IN and OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs However as soon as you set three edit points the VTR automatically sets the fourth point In the figure below the points enclosed in a box have been set manually while the OUT point for the player VTR has been set automatically IN point OUT point Recorder VTR Y M Player VTR A A IN point OUT point
52. CARD indicator lights up when you insert a memory card You can then access the MEMORY CARD menu directly from other menus HOME TC CUE PF1 PF2 by pressing the ACCESS button MEMORY CARD indicator ACCESS button D oo aga lt 09 gt Memory card insertion slot Memory card function To eject the memory card Press the button on the right side of the insertion slot 4 6 Chapter 4 Menu Settings e Be sure to insert the memory card fully If the memory card is not inserted properly the MEMORY CARD indicator will flash If this happens reinsert the memory card e If the battery in the memory card is dead the MEMORY CARD indicator will flash If this happens replace the battery in the memory card e The ACCESS button flashes while the VTR is writing to or reading from a memory card Do not eject the memory card while the indicator is flashing Formatting a memory card The supplied memory card or other memory cards must be formatted before you can use them 3 4 5 2 D olo ogo m a0 Formatting a memory card 1 Insert the memory card The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up 2 Press the ACCESS button MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARDI CARD FOOTBALL TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANKO CURRENT SETUP BASEBA
53. CHECK button NURAM CH COND OTHERS CHK CTL L vl TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY OTHERS CHECK CHECK Vv RS232C STATUS Lx M HEAD ROOM C HOURS PAPA I PAPA O SYSTEM kary METER SETUP SETUP MENU Continued Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 9 yoegheq bulpiosey S seldeu9 yoeghe q Bulpso99y G Jajdeyo 5 3 Preparing for Playback C gt UOA 4 Press the F9 SYSTEM MENU button ACTIVE CH COND SYSTEM MENU SYSTEM MENU SETEN 1F111080 31035 CONVERT F21SYSTEM FREQUENCY MODE MODE 59 94i D cony F31SDI OUT DI D2 spr F4IMETA DATA FILM C C USER F8 Cancel D1 F91Execute of Reset UTR System META with conditions DATA STOP amp not STANDBY FILM EJECT Tape CANCEL EXEC EXIT CACC 5 Press the F1 ACTIVE LINE button to select off Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035 1080 off 1035 and 1080 are used to activate the function to convert the effective scanning line number 6 Press the F9 EXEC A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display To cancel the execution Press the F8 CANCEL button T7 Press the F9 EXEC The HDW F500 is restarted automatically 8 Press the SET UP button The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display Q Select on in the 732 SLOW PROCESS MODE of the VTR SETUP menu o
54. IN button to enter IN point data or OUT button to enter OUT point data The number is entered as the time code or it replaces the existing IN OUT point data To clear the IN OUT point data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be cleared and then press the CLR button while pressing the IN button to clear IN point data or OUT button to clear OUT point data or press the IN or OUT button to clear both IN and OUT point data while pressing the CLR button To increase or decrease IN OUT point data one frame at a time Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be increased or decreased and then press the button to increase the time data or the button to decrease the time data while pressing the IN button or the OUT button Each time you press the or button the time data is increased or decreased by one frame respectively To recall IN OUT point data to the data entry window Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be recalled and then press the RCL button while pressing the IN button to recall IN point data or the OUT button to recall OUT point data 4 47 Chapter 4 Menu Settings ia i Ga nN suas nusy p saldeyo NMI 4 4 CUE Menu SSS SSS SSS ad To enter the current time code continuously 1 Set item 127 Tele File IN OUT input in the VTR SETUP menu to on 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to t
55. IN button and OUT button at the same time The duration between two points appears while the buttons are pressed 4 48 Chapter 4 Menu Settings To preroll to an IN OUT point Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section and press the IN button to preroll to an IN point or OUT button to preroll to an OUT point while pressing the PREROLL button The VTR prerolls to the point and stops For details on setting the preroll time see 4 2 7 Setting the Preroll Time on page 4 18 If the cursor is not on the IN OUT section when pressing the IN OUT button while pressing the PREROLL button the VTR prerolls to the cue point When pressing the PREROLL button only the VTR prerolls to the cue point regardless of the cursor position Automatic time data changes during IN OUT point data entry or modification The table below shows the automatic changes that occur in time data when either the IN point or OUT point is changed When IN point data is entered or modified Status of input data IN point OUT point Thetimesequenceofthe Thedatais The datais IN OUT point datais changed unchanged correct Thetimesequenceofthe Thedatais The datais IN OUT point data is not changed deleted correct The OUT point has not The datais The datais beeninput changed unchanged When OUT point data is entered or modified Status of the input data IN point OUT point Thetimesequ
56. JOG DIAL RESPONSE Shuttle mode The playback speed corresponds to the angle of rotation of the search dial The playback speed is different depending on the frame frequency of the unit The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and 10 times normal speed playback Frame frequency Playback speed 23 98 24 Hz Ranging from 60 to 60 25 Hz Ranging from 58 to 58 29 97 30 Hz Ranging from 50 to 50 Variable mode Playback speed is 1 times normal speed when the search dial is rotated fully counterclockwise and 2 times normal speed when rotated clockwise Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 1 1 yoeghe q Bulpio9ey S sajdeup ih yoeghe q Bulpso99y G Jeldeyo 5 4 Playback Jog mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in jog mode o Oo oO o oO OoOoooo Jog mode playback 1 Press the JOG button so that the JOG button lights up The W indicator lights up and the VTR enters still picture mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and to the desired angle The tape is played back slowly at a speed corresponding to the rotational speed of the search dial A direction indicator lt br gt lights up to indicate the direction of playback 3 Stop rotating the search dial to stop jog mode playback The indicator lights up You can change the search dial mode selection so
57. Naa SAv las las las Tas 13S SIS Ias 54 fas Seve eue YAQ TNON VHdwa xx vHO HO ZH LHO Aiojey xx XX sud NI V NI V NI V NI V dd sud sid x aH aH XX XX XX XX oXX XX xXX oXX oxXX oxX oXX oxX Y oXxX YoXxX ogne ILAS GH ASVHd 13441 ysud ysud ysud sud ysud sud ysud sud ysud ysud ysud ysud sud ysud yndu las ANIA ONAS dNlas a ta za ta a eoma La La ta ta aH aH aH GH za ta 13431 73A37 za 73437 taino 73437 73447 13437 13437 13437 173447 13447 13441 day NI Ajoyoe 4 aNld ONAS dNLas ANH VIWOYHO oaan A H A a A YALSVIN ud ad A YALSVIN OAMAS OAGIA gumas kdd S 0 010 A EM aND N 300 aNalxq AGON Ho 13S 13S 10u d Fld J9Yd J9VYd d9vVd uo INNNSND 39Vd and a1SL 1X3N Add and 02 ozi OLIATXS one one 911 1x9 911 Lian Ho Ho o Hve NIA AGN 391 sid OLIA U opne L oZz ozZL Z 0 GLOLO uo uo uo A A HZL 99L dd Sad u OLTU OLIA TL9O SOd SOd SOd A SOd H Y3dNS VYVHD dSid MNS MNAW 4INIL AGOW 3GOW 30uNOS 13S a10H 13S 13S3u 14S OLIA OLIA VHWHO VYVHO VHVHO ad 9Ldd ANOOOL 13SddAd AdVL LA 30N 4A NNY SOL SOL OL YSINLL YIWIL YAWIL YSIWIL OL fisseo Ne lt 119 o1pne GQ1OHV opne 119 0 pn ADOT O pIA Ho Ho Ho Jo yo yo yo yo oa use 33 s0 0 adz Ho uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo yo gd liaa JNWIL X901 qvayd 3Nn9 Y tHO v H Y ZH W LHO V O3AIA L J14 isv1 OWG 7110u d dY 3Z3344 dud SNI SN
58. PB EE SELECT MENU Output signal types for different operation modes of this VTR are shown below Output Channel VTR Video Audio Operation Mode Standby off EE EE PB MU Standby on PB MU EE EE EE MU Playback PB PB Record EE EE PB PB Edit EE EE PB PB Shuttle PB MU EE EE PB PB Jog PB PB PB MU Variable PB PB PB MU INPUT CHECK INPUT button 1 Output signals during playback are PB PB only Output signals cannot be selected with 017 PB EE SELECT MENU When the INPUT CHECK button is held down the INPUT signals audio and video are output Output signals cannot be selected with 017 PB EE SELECT MENU When the INPUT signals are output only monitor output is changed Line output signals are not changed Pressing the PB EE button changes the output signals during shuttle mode in the following ways 2 wm 3 wm VTR SETUP MENU 017 PB Output signals while the EE SELECT MENU settings F1 PB EE button is held down PB MU EE EE PB PB EE EE EE EE PB MU 4 16 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Note When PB PB is selected during shuttle mode audio output is muted for playback speeds of more than 1 or 2 times normal speed 4 2 2 Record Inhibit Mode REC INH Record inhibit mode is selected by pressing the REC INH button Every time the button is pressed the setting toggles between off and lt all crash REC video CT
59. PB EE SELECT MENU settings the audio and video signals currently being recorded can be simultaneously checked To check video and audio signals during recording In the VTR SETUP menu set 017 PB EE SELECT MENU to PB PB Both audio and video playback signals are output To check video and audio signals during editing In the VTR SETUP menu set 017 PB EE SELECT MENU to PB PB Both audio and video playback signals are output Monitoring previously recorded video and audio signals while recording To monitor previously recorded audio and video signals while recording preread function press the ALT button in the HOME menu then press the PRE READ button For details see Section 4 2 4 Preread Setting PRE READ on page 4 17 5 4 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 1 5 Recording Analog Audio Recording with emphasis You can emphasize analog audio signals that are recorded from the AUDIO INPUT connectors When the emphasis is removed during playback high frequency noise is effectively eliminated without affecting the original signal To use the emphasis function set item 806 AUDIO EMPHASIS in the VTR SETUP menu to on During playback regardless of this setting only signals to which emphasis have been applied are automatically de emphasized 5 2 Recording To record follow the procedure below SONY lt DIGITAL V
60. STOP button flashes when the SERVO REF button in the PF1 menu is set to input but there is no video input signal when the SERVO REF button in the PF1 menu is set to ext but there is no external reference video signal or when the input signal is out of sync with the external reference video signal If you want you can set 102 REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM in the VTR SETUP menu so that the STOP button will not flash under the above conditions 2 10 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls PLAY button Starts playback Press this button while holding down the REC button to start recording Pressing this button during recording or manual editing changes the VTR to playback mode REC EDIT recording edit button Press this button while holding down the PLAY button to start recording If you press this button in play mode manual editing begins After setting edit points if you press this button while the AUTO button is lit automatic editing is performed REC INHIBIT indicator The status of this indicator depends on the setting of the ALT button and REC INH button in the HOME menu and the state of the record protect plug on the cassette Status of the REC INHIBIT indicator Setting of the ALT State of the record REC INHIBIT and F2 REC INH protect plug on the indicator buttons in the cassette HOME menu all Recording disabled Lit flashing Recording allowed Lit crash
61. The JUMPING TC is set 1 frame before STARTING TC A 33 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Items Related to the Video Control 701 The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings item number j ltem Seitable range Function 701 VIDEO INPUT SDI Selects the input video signal select SDTI SDI The SDI video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT conneciors SDTI Only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Boardis insalled The SDTI video signal 270 Mbps inputto the SDTI OPTION IN connector 706 FORCED auto Specifies whether Y add operation mode is automatically VERTICAL forced YADD off turned on during DT playback or not INTERPOLATION auto Y add operation mode is automatically turned on OFF forced YADD off Y add operation mode is off all the time 707 ROUNDING simple Specifies whether ornotA ROUNDING performed adaptive simple A ROUNDING is notused 10 bitinput signals changed to 8 bits by normal rounding rounding down numbers of 4 orless and rounding up numbers of 5 or more adaptive A ROUNDING is applied 10 bit signals are roundedto 8 bits 708 MASTERLEVEL 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD HD SDI OUTPUT connectors Simultaneously adjuststhe Y P s preset 100 100 4000H and Palevels 4000H 141 3 5A70H 709 Y LEVEL HD 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the HD video signal
62. Time data for IN OUT AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points are also displayed 1 LTC and VITC LTC cannot be read when the tape speed is very slow or is changed suddenly VITC on the other hand can be read more accurately than LTC when the VTR is stopped or the tape speed is very low VITC however cannot be read when the tape speed is very fast viTc int L Prst rec DF TCG Selecting the time data display Press the TIMER SEL button repeatedly to select the desired time data display CTL Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape or the CTL signals being recorded on the tape and displays the tape running time in hours minutes seconds and frames TC Displays the value read by the time code reader or the value generated by the time code generator To switch between VITC and LTC press the TCR SEL button UBIT Displays user bits data inserted in time code being played back or the user bits data inserted in time code being recorded To switch between VITC and LTC press the TCR SEL button 2 CTL signals CTL control signals are pulse signals that are recorded horizontally in each frame 3 User bits Comprising a part of the time code user bits record supplementary information and consist of an eight digit number or hexadecimal A to F Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 21 are ne WN sBullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu Selecting the time code and the user bits
63. UNDO ALL button while pressing down the SFT button All changes to the memory label will be cancelled When you press the EJECT button all controls on the VTR will become inoperable until the cassette is completely ejected If you accidentally press the EJECT button before saving data to a memory label Insert the cassette again within 30 seconds after the ejection and press the F10 WRITE EXIT button The data that existed before the ejection of the cassette is saved to the memory label Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 41 ia i Ga nN 4 4 CUE Menu Four levels of information can be displayed in the TELE File menu and the levels can be scrolled to the left or right by pressing the lt or gt button CUE CH COND TELEF ILE CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN SCAN TCR 00 00 00 00 E amp i TCR 00 00 00 00 ENTRY Res tes 0 ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLEINAGANO JUMP LARGE HILLI POINT TITLECNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL C COMMNT EDIT C CHANGE DATA E DEL M CUENUM WRITE POINT POINT EXIT E M j E Line number TELE FILE menu display 1 TELE FILE menu display 3 Q gt g w 3 CUE CH CON
64. VTR memory bank To add or change a title for VTR settings after storing them to the VTR memory bank Move the cursor P to the number of the VTR where the settings are stored then press the EDIT TITLE button Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank Jol oo 4 9 9 a0b O UU Ol 52 5000 00 0000 371 4 EDIT TITLE GBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 54 amp _ HD1D2CAM K SAVE EXIT C BACK SET 7 SPACE SPACE LETTER L L dj CANCEL CL Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the VTR BANK button The VTR BANK menu appears in the display For more information refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 Recovering previous settings after new settings have been saved Press the UNDO button to recover the previous settings Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Move the cursor to the memory bank to be protected and press ALT PROTECT buttons A will appear next to the selected bank Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu appears again CH COND UTR BANK FOOTBALL TCR 00 00 00 00 UTR BANK o SUED UNDO CURRENT SETUP SETUP BANK
65. adjusting an internal digital video processor 8 kinds of record playback modes As the record playback mode you can select from the following 8 modes 59 941 601 50i 23 98 PsF 24PsF 25 PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF HD pull down By installing an optional HD Pull Down Board HKDV 507 507D the HD SDI output to which the audio signal and VITC are multiplexed of 59 941 or 60i mode are also available when the unit is operated in the 23 98PsF or 24PsF mode Noiseless playback with DT heads Using the playback DT heads you can perform noiseless playback at 51 speeds ranging from 1 to 2 times normal speed including still picture playback Video and audio confidence heads Video and audio channels 1 through 4 signals can be recorded and simultaneously played back to check the recording Internal time code generator and reader The internal time code generator allows you to record time code LTC or user bits together with video and audio signals Time codes LTC or user bits can be read during playback using the time code reader Computer servo system Computer controlled servo motors provide direct drive for the drum capstan and two reels enabling quick and accurate tape access 1 A contact free system for writing reading and modifying video cassette related information on IC memory bearing labels Tele File is a trademark of Sony Corporation 1 2 Chapter 1 Overview Capstan override function You can adjust the playback sp
66. air cue from the on air start point e Starting playback immediately after prerolling To avoid operation errors we recommend that you use the VTR alone when performing DMC playback oO oO oO oO oO ola Oo Ojo Oo ojo m oOooooo CoO oO Performing DMC playback To start playback at the on air cue from the on air start point 1 Press the PREROLL button The PREROLL button lights up and the tape is cued up to the on air start point 2 Press the PREVIEW button at the moment the on air cue is given The PREVIEW button lights up When the tape passes the speed variation start point DMC playback starts and continues at the speed s stored in memory When the tape passes the speed variation end point normal speed playback starts and the tape stops at the on air end point To start playback immediately after prerolling Press the PREVIEW button The PREVIEW button lights up When the tape passes the speed variation start point DMC playback starts and continues at the speed s stored in memory When the tape passes the speed variation end point normal speed playback resumes 5 15 Chapter 5 Recording Playback yoeghe q Buipsooey G saydeup yoeghe q Bulpio99y G Jeldeyo 5 4 Playback To stop the tape during DMC playback Press the STOP button To exit DMC playback mode Press the ALT DMC button in HOME menu to go off DMC on the display D
67. and to achieve time code continuity during continuous recording This signal is recorded on a longitudinal tape track Cue point A point used to mark the beginning of a section of tape so that it can be located for later playback or editing Drop frame mode When the field frequency of this unit is 59 94 Hz the actual number of frames per second is approximately 29 97 while the time code value advances one second every 30 frames In drop frame mode the time code is advanced such a way that this difference in the value between real time and the time codes is corrected Specifically two frames are skipped at the beginning of each minute except for every tenth minute so that the frame value for time codes matches that for real time See also Non drop frame mode E E mode Abbreviation for Electric to Electric mode In this mode the signals are passed through the VTRis electronics before output but do not pass through the magnetic converter circuits such as the tape and head circuits This mode is used for confirming input signals or adjusting the input level Effect edit mode When editing a tape using a switcher or when editing special effects the pixels comprising the picture are often not dubbed to the same positions as those of the original In the case of repeated dubbings this shifting of pixels produces an accumulation of calculation errors during the compression expansion process this may result in an increase i
68. buttons P 00 ua 128t0 127 ae 05to 05H Fine adjustment of the sync phase D1 D2 Make this adjustment with the ALT FINE buttons P 00 k Nia 00104 Hb Oto296nsec 4 6 PF2 Menu Factory Settings The PF2 menu is used to register frequently used menu items When shipped from the factory the PF2 menu contains the adjustment menu for audio signals If you later use the PF2 menu to register items from other menus you can restore the PF2 menu to its original factory settings For details on registration methods see Section 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF 1 2 Menus on page 4 3 and on restoring factory set menu items see Section 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function on page 4 4 To activate the PF2 menu screen by recalling SETUP BANK from the VTR memory Press the PF2 button banks A IN REMAIN T CH COND PFZ CH1 L 113min AES EBU Td PLAY BOER de F A IN AIN i i A IN IN 2 CH3 AES EBU A IN CH4 AES EBU E 0014 00m OOs OO AOUT OUTS sasea EMPHA SIs MON L MON R SEL SEL off 12222 _2___ PF2 menu display PF2 menu factory settings Button Indication Function Settings E1 A IN CH1 Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 1 SDI AES EBU analg SDT F2 A IN CH2 Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 2 F3 A
69. by item 121 are as follows SYSTEM FREQUENCY off The field frequency of both the unit and the tape are not displayed diff The field frequency of both the unit and the tape are displayed only when they do not match ever The field frequency of both the unit and the tape are always displayed ACTIVE LINE HD off The effective scanning line number to be input or played back and to be output are not displayed diff The effective scanning line number to be input and output are displayed only when they do not match ever The effective scanning line number to be input and output are always displayed EOS DISPLAY off EOS is not displayed on EOS is displayed A 6 Appendix VIDEO INT SG off The type of the test signal generated by the internal video test signal generator is not displayed on The type of the test signal generated by the internal video test signal generator is displayed AUDIO INT SG off The operating status of the internal audio test signal generator is not displayed on The operating status of the internal audio test signal generator is displayed META DATA off Settings are not displayed during the recording of meta data on Settings are displayed during the recording of meta data Information displayed for each item The information displayed for ACTIVE LINE HD VIDEO INT SG and AUDIO INT SG are specified by T02 INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR HD TO3 INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATO
70. ch1 sw CH3 CH4 sw ch2 or CH3 CH4 ch1 ch2 The level control for LINE MONITOR outputis independent of E E CONFI and PB modes even when this setting is CH3 CH4 ch1 sw CH3 CH4 sw ch2 or CH3 CH4 ch1 ch2 813 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT MIXING add rms average Specifies the type of audio mixing to be conducted on the digital audio signal output to the MONITOR OUTPUT connector add Simple addition rms Multiplied average average Simple average When the CUE channel signal is output to the monitor signals are mixed by simple addition 814 LEVEL METER SCALE peak 0 dB reference 0 dB Specifies the mode in which the digital audio level is displayed peak 0 dB Displays minus audio levels with the maximum level set at 0 dB reference 0 dB Displays plus and minus audio levels with the reference level set at0 dB The cue channellevelis always displayed with the reference level set at 0 dB 815 AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE preset 128 128 255 Sets the outputtiming for the digital audio playback signal SDI and AES EBU only The 128 setting specifies the reference position A setting lower than 128 advances the output timing anda setting higherthan 128 delays the outputtiming 128 samples or approx 2 7 ms with 1 sample approx 20 us 817 AUDIOLEVEL METER DIMMER CONTROL 0 7 Specifies the brightness of the audio level meter Oisthe br
71. color frame flag is determined by the operating mode of the time code generator When PRESET mode i e item 606 is set to preset and the VTR is in a mode other than automatic edit mode the time code signal is generated with color flame locked to the video signal and the color frame flag is ON e When REGENE mode i e item 606 is set to regene or the VTR is in automatic edit mode color frame flag is OFF 616 VITC POSITION 1 select PAL 9 322 line 19 332 line 22 335 line When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is installed and 25PsF 50i mode is selected on the VTR this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 9 322 to 22 335 Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 617 VITC POSITION 2 select PAL 9 322 line 21 334 line 22 335 line When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is installed and 25PsF 50i mode is selected on the VTR this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is inserted It can be inserted in any lines from 9 322 to 22 335 Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines 620 SUPERIMPOSED CHARACTER off on Specifies whether or not to superimpose time data and operating status information on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER con
72. current time code is entered on that line To delete a time code 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Time section to be deleted To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons Press the F5 DEL POINT button A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of the deletion operation To delete the line as well as the time code Press the DEL POINT button while pressing down the SFT button The line is deleted and all the lines below are moved up by one Then press the DEL POINT button while pressing down the SFT button The time code section becomes blank and is ready for new time code input CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN TCR 00 00 00 00 ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLE NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL L No Time Mrk IN 0 00 01 02 03 NG 00 01 01 03 KP piam eis l COMMNT EDIT 2 00 03 04 03 OK 00 03 03 03 3 00 04 04 03 OK 00 04 03 03 4 00 05 05 03 NG 00 05 04 03 CHANGE 5 00 06 06 03 OK 00 06 05 03 DATA ae aaa L I DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT LjL_jb jj To un
73. data is inserted to the MODE first line instead of 30 frame time data off 30 frame time data is displayed on 24 frame time data is displayed The setting of this item is effective only when the operation mode of this unitis setto 23 98PsF or 24PsF A10 TCsense data 24F When an HKDV 5070D optional HD Pull Down Board is select 30F installed and the operating frequency is setto 23 976PsF specifies whether or not the 30 frame sec time code information of pull down output signal and down converted output signalis returned when time code sense command isinputthrough the 9 pin connector 24F 24 frame sec time code information of main output signalis returned 30F 30 frame sec time code information of pull down output signal and down converted output signal is returned e Pull down output signal and 30 frame sec time code are synchronized only when this unitis setto PLAY LOCK mode To synchronize the signals setitem A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE to lock2 e Machine to machine editing using the pull down output signal witha VTR operating in 30F mode may not function properly ifthe VTR in 30F mode is engaged in player sync Appendix A 45 xipueddy Menu List Other Items T01 The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings litem number Item Seittable range Function T01 AUTO REPEAT off Selects the repeating operation in automatic editing MODE on
74. ec ceeccceeeeceseceeeteeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 11 4 1 7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and Memory Card Functions 4 12 4 1 8 Memory Card Data Compatibility 0 0 eee ececeeeeceeneeeteeees 4 13 4 2 HOME Menu cssssssscsccscsccccsccsccneccesescesccssessesscssesssssneesersesees 4 14 4 2 1 Selecting the Output Signals PB EE cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 16 4 2 2 Record Inhibit Mode REC INH ccccecccsssceceeeeeesnsees 4 16 4 2 3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel ASSEMBLE or INS CUE ccc ececeeeceeeeeeeeeceseeaeeaeeenees 4 17 4 2 4 Preread Settings PRE READ 0 cee eec ce ceeeeteceenteceeeeeeeeeees 4 17 4 2 5 Still Picture Output FREEZE 0 ee eceecceseeceereeeeceeeeeeaeees 4 17 4 2 6 Selecting the Capstan Servo Lock Mode CAP LOCK 4 18 4 2 7 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME 4 18 4 2 8 Selecting DMC Playback DMC ou cee eee eeceesteceeeeeeeeees 4 19 4 2 9 Recalling Edit Points LAST EDIT 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 19 Continued Chapter 4 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings sssscccsssssscsssseeeeses 4 1 Table of Contents 1 ee ii s U9 U0D jo age HMI Table of Contents eee eee eee eee a Chapter 4 4 3 TC Menu Bab ssesses see sseeenesnanassssococgnnsonsnnnnsssssooncgneeensnansssssoosgegetsesansesess 4 20 Menu Settings 4 3 1 Setting the Time Data TIMER SEL RESET SET HOLD 4 21 4 3 2 Setting the Time Code Reader TCR SEL eee 4 24 4 3 3 Setting the
75. editing even if there are breaks in the continuity in the time codes Steps in automatic editing The sequence of steps that are taken to do automatic editing with two VTRs is as follows Select the edit mode page 6 3 4 Set edit points for the recorder and player VTR page 6 3 4 Preview the edit section page 6 9 Perform the edit page 6 12 4 Confirm and modify the edit points pages 6 8 and 6 10 Confirm the results of the edit page 6 13 Editing precautions Using an editing control unit When using an editing control unit to control the VTR set the edit delay on the control unit so that CUT IN and CUT OUT commands are sent to the VTR five frames ahead of the actual edit point Chapter 6 Editing 6 1 P iY O amp D o gt m Q gt Co Bupa 913 dey9 HA 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing SS a aa UH 6 1 2 Setting Switches and Menus Before editing set the following switches as shown below AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons input signal Recorder VTR POWER switch ON i O O O Q QJ REC level controls recording levels S0000 E REMOTE buttons None of Q these buttons light up a lola 4 9 0 D m m l 2000 o00000 O OO F1 VIDEO IN button in the PF1 menu factory s
76. fade in see figure below CROSS FADE IN PB OUT INPUT FADE IN OUT IN OUT PB INPUT e The t in the figures above is the time set by item 811 e When editing non audio data be sure to select cut edit e Noise may be produced during the editing of certain non audio data 318 EDIT RETRY off Set this item when the VTR is used as a recorder during VTR to VTR editing Specifies the action taken when the recorder fails to synchronize with the player VTR off Editing is not executed and the VTR enters STOP mode on The VTR automatically repeats the editing again not more than twice 320 PLAY COMMAND DELAY START TIME 30 frame O frame 30 frame This adjusts the time in frames required between the issue of a playback command and this unit actually beginning the execution of the command This adjustment is useful for synchronization between VTRs with widely differing start up timing 321 VIDEO PREVIEW MODE VVV VBV During a preview operation this selects the video signals that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output connectors VVV VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO In the editing interval the monitored signal is the player video signal or video input EE signal VBV VIDEO BLACK VIDEO In the editing interval the monitored signal is a black signal 322 AUDIO PREVIEW MODE SSS SMS D
77. in the VTR SETUP menu under item 004 CAPSTAN LOCK select During playback at increased or decreased speed the SERVO indicator goes off since the servo is not locked capstan override 2 Release the PLAY button after you have finished adjusting the phase The VTR returns to normal speed playback and the SERVO indicator lights up 5 14 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 4 4 DMC Playback Overview of DMC playback DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback allows you to vary the playback speed in variable mode in the DT playback range between 1 and 2 times normal speed for certain sections of the tape then store the specified speed in memory for later playback For example during a live broadcast of a sporting event you can set the start and end points of important scenes while recording and immediately play back and broadcast those scenes using DMC playback Storing playback speeds in memory Follow the procedure below to store playback speeds in memory Storing playback speeds in memory 1 In HOME menu press the ALT button then press the DMC button tolightup DMC on the display 2 Set a start point during recording or on a previously recorded tape by simultaneously pressing the ENTRY button and the IN button 3 Press the STOP button to enter stop mode 4 Rotate the search dial to select the initial playback speed The selected speeds are shown in the t
78. in the VTR SETUP menu and PANEL SETUP To change the SET UP menu page menu Press the ALT button For details on storing and recalling data to or from the VTR memory banks or memory card and registering items to the PF menus see Section 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings on page 4 1 Y indicates that more than one menu page exists UTR REMAIN T CH COND SETUP BANK L 113min Le a F11 UTR BANK Copy data between current setup and 8 banks WJ F2IMEMORY CARD Copy data between VTR and memory card F41PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN Assign PF1 PF2 menu function keys F5IPANEL SETUP Panel setting PF1g2 FS1UTR SETUP UTR current setup ASSIGN J L PANEL UTR REMOTE REMOTE SETUP SETUP S PIN SO PIN E Leer SET UP menu display SET UP menu Button Indication Function Settings E1 VTRBANK See Section 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function on page 4 4 F2 MEMORY CARD See Section 4 1 5 Memory Card Function on page 4 6 F4 PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN See Section 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF1 2 Menus on page 4 3 E5 PANELSETUP See Section 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Menu on page 4 63 F6 VTR SETUP See Section 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu on page 4 61 F8 REMOTE 9 PIN Selects remote operation through a device connected to the REMOTE1 on off IN 9P OUT 9P connectors F9 REMOTE 50 PIN Selects remote
79. in the lower control Press this button while in standby mode to turn the panel button off and cancel standby mode The head drum stops rotating and the tape tension is released If the VTR remains in standby mode for more than eight minutes factory setting standby mode is automatically canceled in order to safeguard the tape Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 9 S 0 U00 puke seg JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo NN 01UOD pue Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 19 deyo NM 2 1 Control Panel PREROLL button Press to position the tape to the preroll point a position factory set to five seconds before the IN point Press this button while holding down the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button to cue up the tape at the edit point of the respective button For details onchanging the preroll time refer to 4 2 7 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLLTIME onpage 4 18 PREVIEW REVIEW button After edit points are set press this button to preview on the monitor connected to the recorder the effect of the edit before it is performed In this operation the tape runs but no editing is carried out If you press this button after carrying out an edit the results of the edit are played back on the monitor connected to the recorder SERVO indicator Lights up when the drum servo and capstan servo are locked STOP button When you insert the cassette the VTR automatically enters stop mode The
80. indication disappears 4 46 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Entering and modifying IN OUT point data You can use either the ENTRY button or the numeric buttons to enter and modify IN OUT point data To enter or modify IN OUT point data using the ENTRY button gt Jol oo 4 9 9 lt 5 m U a o Oo Oo oO m o O oO O o Oooooo 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section on which the current time code is to be entered or replaced To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the IN button to enter IN point data or OUT button to enter OUT point data while pressing down the ENTRY button The current time code is entered as the IN OUT point data or it replaces the existing IN OUT point data If the cursor is not on the IN OUT section when pressing the IN OUT button while pressing down the ENTRY button the current time code is entered as the Time data or it replaces the existing Time data When pressing the ENTRY button only the Time data is entered or replaced regardless of the cursor position To enter or modify IN OUT point d
81. is pressed and 2 by the entry of cue point data with the numeric buttons Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button 1 53 4 Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button 1 Press the ALT button then the PAGE MODE button or the EXTEND MODE button 2 If you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button 3 Press the A or M button to move the cursor P to the cue number to be registered PREU REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min EOS 00 00 00 00 TCR 00 00 00 00 LI AM CUE TITLE 1 NEXT PAGE PAGE u 3 4 5 6 TELE FILE C CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR To select the cue number directly by numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button 4 Press the JOG or VAR button then rotate the search dial to find the position where you want to register the cue point 5 Press the ENTRY button at the selected position The current tape address of the position where the button is pressed is registered as a cue point Press the ENTRY button repeatedly to register the cue point repeatedly The cue number will aut
82. mode Push in again for the factory set recording level 0 dB reference level for an input of 4 dB When pushed in the controls cannot adjust the recording level Audio level meters Indicate the recording level in recording or E E mode or the playback level in playback or CONFI mode The display range can be changed by pressing the DISPLAY FULL FINE button The reference level is factory set at 20 dB and the peak level at 0 dB MONITOR SELECT button Selects the audio signal to be output at the MONITOR OUTPUT L R connector s Press to light the button up then press the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT button s to specify which channel s are to be monitored at the MONITOR OUTPUT L or R connector If you specify more than one channel to the same MONITOR OUTPUT connector a mixed audio signal is output from that connector This specification can also be done with setting the VTR SETUP menu 807 808 AUDIO MONITOR L R select For details see Section 4 6 3 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal MON LSEL MON R SEL on page 4 58 1 E E mode An abbreviation for Electric to Electric mode In this mode video or audio input signals are passed and output Indicator window The following indicators light up to indicate the VTR s status Indicators and corresponding VTR status Indicator Status CHANNEL Indicates the playback signal condition CONDITION Green Playback signal is good Yellow Playback signal is less than go
83. mode after remaining in standby on mode for a specified length of time to prevent wear or damage to the tape and video heads A 14 Appendix Time code A digital signal recorded on the video tape that supplies information such as hour minute second and frame number for each frame to facilitate the setting of edit points or searching for specific scenes on the tape There are two types of time codes SMPTE for the NTSC color system and EBU for the PAL SECAM color system and two time code recording formats LTC longitudinal time codes which are CTL signals and audio signals simultaneously recorded longitudinally on the tape and VITC vertical interval time codes which are recorded on the video signal track Tracking The synchronizing of the head drum rotation phase and tape transport phase during playback and recording Tracking is adjusted to eliminate picture instability when playing back material recorded on another VTR User bits A recordable 32 bit section in each time code on a video tape for recording such information as the recording year month and day and the tape or program ID number Vertical interval time code See VITC VITC Abbreviation for Vertical Interval Time Code This is a time code recorded on a video signal track during the vertical blanking interval This VTR writes this time code in the AUX data area in the video signals It can be read correctly even during slow or still picture p
84. motion playback on Activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback off Do notactivate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback This setting has no effect when the VTR is operated in PSF mode A 35 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Item number ltem Seittable range Function 754 DOWNCONVERTER EDGE CROP When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is MODE installed selects the mode N EDGE CROP Selects edge crop mode LETTER BOX Selects letter box mode SQUEEZE Selects squeeze mode 755 MASTER LEVEL 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the high D1 video signal output from D D1 CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector Simultaneously adjusts preset 100 the Y B Y and R Y level 4000H i 141 3 5A70H 756 Y LEVEL D1 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV preset 100 SDI OUT OPTION connector Simultaneously adjusts the Y 4000H 100 4000F levels 141 3 5A70H 757 B Y LEVEL D1 0 0 0H Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV preset 100 SDI OUT OPTION connector Adjusts the B Y level of the 4000H 100 4000H video signal 141 3 5A70H 758 R Y LEVEL D1 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV preset 100 SDI OUT OPTION connector Adjusts the R Y level of the 4000H
85. of calculation appears in the display SET is displayed TIMER REMAIN T CH COND TC SEL L 113min GREEN 01 00 30 00 TC PLAY LOCK TIMER TCR VITC 2FD F1 CG 01n 04n 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 TIMER SET TIMER HOLD TC TCG TCG RUN SEL souRceE mope mope PF NDF VITC vitc int L Prst rec DF TCG 4 Press the TIMER SET button The input value is set as the time code and appears in the time data display section e Time codes from an external time code generator cannot be set e Time codes cannot be set when the internal time code generator is locked to external time codes or to time codes read by the time code reader 4 23 Chapter 4 Menu Settings are ne WN sBullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu Setting the CTL timer Select CTL using the TIMER SEL button Enter data in the data entry window using the number buttons Press the SET button to set the data A Q N Press TIMER SET Note When 12H is selected in the 604 TAPE TIMER DISPLAY setting in the VTR SETUP menu and a value of 10H or more is entered the first digit will be dropped Resetting time data Press the TIMER RESET button The internal time code generator is reset according to the setting of the TIMER SEL button Resetting TC or UBIT data The internal time code
86. of the TC menu is set to ON text data such as time codes are superimposed Note This connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 507 507D HD PULL DOWN Board is installed TIME CODE OUT connector XLR 3 31 Outputs the following time codes according to the VTR operation mode In playback mode Playback time codes In recording mode Time codes generated by the internal time code generator or time codes input to the TIME CODE IN connector To select the output signal for the TIME CODE OUT connector use the 613 TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN REGEN MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu Setting Description off tape In playback mode playback time codes are selected and in recording mode TCH time code signals are used regene Playback time codes are regenerated and output only in playback mode when the servo is locked In all other cases output is the same as for the off tape setting through The time code signal from the TIME CODE IN connector is output as is Used during cascade connections For more information about cascade connections see 3 1 4 Cascade Connections on page 3 4 TIME CODE IN connector XLR 3 32 Accepts external time codes for recording to tape Connect to the time code output connector of the external equipment Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 17 s OUOD pue Sed jo SUORDUN pue suoqeo0 z sejdeyg hI 3 1 Connecting External Equip
87. output from the HD preset 100 i SDIOUTPUT connectors Adjusts the Y level of the video 4000H 100 4000H signal 141 3 5A70H 1 A ROUNDING A method for rounding a 10 bit signal to 8 bits This process suppresses step noise that occurs when lines which differ slightly from the horizontal are displayed A ROUNDING is a trademark of Sony Corp A 34 Appendix Item number ltem Seitable range Function 710 Ps LEVEL HD 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD preset 100 SDIOUTPUT connectors AdjuststheP slevelofthe video 4000H 100 4000H signal 141 3 5A70H 711 Pr LEVEL HD 0 0 OH Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD preset 100 SDIOUTPUT connectors AdjuststheP rlevelofthe video 4000H 100 4000H signal 141 3 5A70H 712 SETUP LEVEL 10 0 Adjusts the level of the HD video signal output from the HD HD SDIOUTPUT connectors Adjusts the setup level of the preset 0 0 0 video signal 10 0 713 SYNC PHASE HD 128 Controls the H sync phase of the HD video signal output preset 0 fromthe HD SDIOUTPUT connectors according to the 0 menu 127 714 FINE HD 0 Controls the H sync phase of the HD video signal output preset 0 i fromthe HD SDIOUTPUT connectors according to the 1024 menu 720 EFFECT EDIT o
88. recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the F4 CHANGE DATA button CUT No EDIT GIBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUUXYZ abcdefshijiklmnoparstuvuxyz 0123456789110 lt gt t xk 7 55 H R _ HDID2CAM 3 Press the K or l button to select a character SET LETTER L SAVE EXIT SPACE space Lt CUT No EDIT ABC DEF GHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUWXYZ abcdefshijiklmnoparstuvuxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 55 H R _ HDID2CAM SET LETTER C SAVE EXIT C BACK SPACE SPACE CIC 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the center cursor button The selected character is entered CUT No EDIT ABC DEF GHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 012345678911 lt gt x 7 55 SH _ HDID2CAM BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL EXIT M 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character Continued 4
89. respectively The VTR is factory set so that pressing the JOG SHUTTLE or VAR button is required in order to enter variable speed playback mode To change this setting use item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu 5 13 Chapter 5 Recording Playback yoeghe q Buipsooey G saydeup yoeghe q Bulpio99y G Jeldeyo 5 4 Playback 5 4 3 Capstan Override Playback When playing back the same program on two VTRs you can adjust the playback phases of the two VTRs so that they are synchronized There are two ways to make this adjustment A Using the search dial B Using the buttons When using method A change the system setup so that jog shuttle mode playback is inhibited even when the search dial is rotated Doing so prevents the VTR from accidentally entering jog shuttle mode during capstan override playback Make this setting through 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu 5 ololo 4 90 1 2 dia Capstan override playback 1 Use either method A or B A Rotate the search dial while holding down the PLAY button to adjust the playback speed The adjustment range is 15 in steps of 1 of the normal playback speed B Press the or button while holding down the PLAY button to adjust the playback speed Every time the or button is pressed the speed changes using the field number set
90. signal A 42 Appendix includes shuttlingupto x10 normaltape speed non DT picture non DTpicture item number ltem Seitable range Function 905 STOP FREEZE disable Enable ordisables the stop freeze function CONTROL enable Stop freeze opration MODE After STOP TENSION OFF STDBY OFF MODE Before STILL i dynamictrackingon DT picture DT picture DT picture CAPSTAN drive non DT picture Reeldrive includes shuttlingover x10 normaltape speed non DTpicture non DT picture non DT picture e A DT picture is a frozen picture in noiseless DT playback mode The picture freezes in frame mode when the dynamic tracking is performing a frame operation It freezes in field mode when dynamic tracking is not performing a frame operation e A non DT picture is a frozen picture in shuttle mode A block pattern may appear in a non DT picture depending on the circumstances Appendix A 43 xipueddy Menu List Items Related to the Pull Down Control A01 The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings Item number A01 Item PD TIME CODE DISPLAY Settable range off on Function Sets whether or notto display the pull down time code on the time code display area off Does notdisplay the pull down time code on Displays the pull down time code A02 PD PRESET FRAME MODE 24 FRAME MODE 3
91. signal processing takes a 4 2 2 component signal which has been quantized according to ITU R709 SMPTE 274M SMPTE 260M BTA S 002B standards and subjects it to pre filter and then further applies data compression by using a coefficient recording system Audio signals are processed using full bit processing based on the AES EBU format Input interface The input interface is based on the SMPTE 291M 292M 299M BTA S 004B 005B 006B ARIB STD B 4 HD component SDI Serial Digital Interface format allowing a single BNC coaxial cable to carry one component video signal four digital audio channels and time code in time division multiplex this is separated for conversion to parallel data The interface can be used to record audio data from an AES EBU digital interface or digitally converted analog signals 1 HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation Bit rate reduction encoder The component video signal data is compressed by a factor of about four by a process in which it is subjected to frame shuffling blocking DCT discrete cosine transform quantizing adjustment and variable length word encoding This is the core of the newly developed coefficient recording system ECC encoder The outer ECC Error Correction Code is added to the compressed video and audio data followed by the inner ECC ID data and sync data The Reed Solomon code is employed in this error correction system Channel coding Video and audio data with t
92. starting point setting on that line are write protected CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN TCR 00 00 00 00 ENTRY REC DATEI1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL No Time Mrk IN COMMNT gt Onla LL02 03 NS 00 01 01 09 EDIT 2 00 03 04 03 OK 00 03 03 03 O 3 00 04 04 03 OK 00 04 03 03 4 00 05 05 03 NG 00 05 04 03 CHANGE 5 00 06 06 03 OK 00 06 05 03 DATA PE chia CA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT a A To cancel a write protection Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line for which write protection is to be cancelled Then press the PROTECT button A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of cancellation operation Press the PROTECT button while pressing down the SFT button Inserting a new line 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line that will be under the new line to be inserted To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons If the movement of the cursor P is not linked with the cursor buttons the cursor P will not move when the curso
93. still picture mode This is the normal setting for VTR operations loose Sets the tape tension lower than that of the normal setting after the VTR enters still picture mode In this case picture playback is not ensured For long standbys e g LMS in still picture mode this setting is recommended A 28 Appendix Items Related to the Time Code 601 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number 601 Selects the timing mode for the time code generator and the Item DF NDF MODE select Settable range drop frame non drop frame auto Function CTL counter drop frame drop frame mode DF indication non drop frame non drop frame mode NDF indication auto Drop frame non drop frame mode is selected automatically on the basis of the frame frequency of the unit For 29 97 Hz drop frame mode is selected and for 30 Hz non drop frame mode is selected The setting of the frame frequency mode is carried out with the MAINTENANCE F9 OTHERS CHECK SYSTEM buttons Note e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz When the F7 TCG MODE key is set to regene the time code generator is synchronized to the playback time code and therefore this setting is disabled 602 TIMER MODE select CTL TC UBIT Selects the mode for displaying time data CTL Duri
94. text information such as time codes output from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector the 3 SUPER connector of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors without BG White characters with no background outlined White characters outlined in black translucent White characters on a gray screen background with BG White characters on a black background Note For the D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector and D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER TYconnector the translucent setting is automatically changed to with BG 625 CHARACTER SIZE x1 x2 x3 Sets the size of text information such as time codes output from the MONITOR of HD SDI OUTPUT connector the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 3 SUPER of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connector and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors x 1 Normal size x 2 Twice normal size x 3 Three times normal size 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select time data amp status time data amp UB time data amp CTL time data amp VITC time data only When item 620 is set to on this setting specifies the content of text information output from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector the 3 SUPER connector of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors time data amp status Ti
95. that pressing the search dial switches the VTR between jog and shuttle modes For details on switching the search dial functions refer to the supplied Mainenance Manual 5 12 Chapter 5 Recording Playback Shuttle mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in shuttle mode fod O10 9 9 9 a0b gt mm a m mm L oO oOooooo 3 1 2 3 Shuttle mode playback 1 Press the SHUTTLE button so that the SHUTTLE button lights up The Mindicator lights up and the VTR enters still picture mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and set the angle of rotation as required to obtain the desired playback speed Shuttle mode 60 58 50 60 58 50 The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds to the angle of the search dial A direction indicator lt br gt lights up to indicate the direction of playback The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and 10 times normal speed playback 3 Set the search dial to center position for still picture or press the STOP button to stop shuttle mode playback To return to normal speed playback Press the PLAY button The audio signal output status is specified by the following settings of 017 PB EE SELECT MENU in the VTR SETUP menu EE The input audio is output MU The audio output is muted PB The playback audio signal is output for playba
96. the ALT Y LEVEL buttons 100 4000H wn 0001413 mb o0t0 3dB Adjusting the B Y output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT B Y LEVEL buttons 100 4000H ain 0001413 Eb oot0 3dB 4 57 Chapter 4 Menu Settings sBurjes nueyy p Jeldeyo Wi sum s nu y p 4a deup DININ 4 5 PF1 Menu Factory Settings Adjusting the R Y output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT R Y LEVEL buttons 100 4000H uN 0001413 m oct 3dB Adjusting the video output level D2 Make this adjustment with the ALT VIDEO LEVEL buttons t 1007 4000H un 00t01413 mp 000 3dB Adjusting the chroma output level D2 Make this adjustment with the ALT CHROMA GAIN buttons 100 4000H uN 0001413 zb oot0 3dB Adjusting the hue D2 Make this adjustment with the ALT HUE buttons p Co d Nia 3030 gt 3070430 Adjusting the setup level D2 Make this adjustment with the ALT SETUP LEVEL buttons 75IRE 75 Na to 100 4b Oto 10 0IRE 4 58 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Adjusting the sync phase D1 D2 Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of the VTR to the reference signal or when using a switcher or other device connected to another VTR to create special effects such as fading wrapping and dissolving To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to the reference input make this adjustment with the ALT SYNC PHASE
97. the video signals PREREAD indicator will be lit audio Pre read the audio signals PREREAD indicator will be lit a v Pre read both audio and video signals PREREAD indicator will be lit F1 button 5 Jol oo 4 9 9 a0b PREREAD indicator The pre read function can be used for pre read editing 4 2 5 Still Picture Output FREEZE For stillpicture output press the ALT FREEZE button The picture that was playing just before the button was pressed will be frozen on the screen Make the field or frame selection using the 902 FREEZE MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu To maintain the still picture Set 903 FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in the VTR SETUP menu to latch The still picture output is maintained until the FREEZE button is pressed again To temporarily output a still picture Set 903 FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in the VTR SETUP menu to momentary A still picture is output as long as you hold down the FREEZE button Stop freeze function To automatically output a still picture when the VTR is changed to stop mode set 905 STOP FREEZE CONTROL in the VTR SETUP menu to enable Note Regardless of the setting of 902 FREEZE MODE in the VTR SETUP menu stop freeze is always a field freeze picture 4 17 Chapter 4 Menu Settings a i i WM sbulyjas nuey p saldeyo NMI 4 2 HOME Menu 4 2 6 Selecting the Capstan Serv
98. to be inserted in two lines A 30 Appendix Item number Item Settable range Function 613 TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE off tape regene through Specifies the signal output to the TIME CODE OUT connector when the internal time code generator is in a mode for regenerating the playback time code i e during auto edit mode or when item 607 is set to int LTC or int VITC and item 606 is set to regene off tape The playback time code signal is output to the TIME CODE OUT connector without regeneration regene The playback time code signal is output to the TIME CODE OUT connector after regeneration only when the VTR is in playback mode through The playback time code signal is output 614 PHASE CORRECTION off on Specifies whether the phase correction control of the LTC signal generated by the time code generator is applied or not off The phase correction control is not applied on The phase correction control is applied 615 TCG CF FLAG off on auto Specfies whether the color frame CF flag is set ON or not set OFF in the blank bit of the time code data off Color frame flag is set OFF on Color frame flag is set ON auto Color frame flag is set ON or OFF depending on the phase relationship of the color framing between the recorded video signal and the time code signal When this item is set to auto the
99. 0 FRAME MODE Selects the time code to be preset The A frame of the pulldown sequence can be preset 24 FRAME MODE The 24 frames time code is preset 30 FRAME MODE The 30 frames time code is preset A03 PD SUPERIMPOSED CHARACTER off Specifies whether or notto superimpose time data and operating status information onthe signal outputfrom the PULL DOWN OUT connector off Noinformationis superimposed on Information is superimposed A04 PD DF NDF SELECT drop frame non dropframe auto Selects the running mode for the pull down time code to be preset dropframe Drop frame mode non dropframe Non drop frame mode auto The unit switches the running mode DF NDF automatically according to the frame frequency ofthe unit When the frame frequency is 23 976 Hz the unit switches to the drop frame mode and switches to the non drop frame mode when itis 24 Hz A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE off lock1 lock2 When an HKDV 507D optional HD Pull Down Board is installed and the operating frequency is setto 23 976PsF specifies whether or notthe pull down output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with external SD EXT SD reference signal To outputthe pull down signal an HKDV 507D optional HD Pull Down Board mustbe installed To outputthe down converted signal an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board mustbe insta
100. 00 00 TCR 00 00 00 00 NEXT eA I AM CUE TITLE 1 PAGE i 10 00 01 10 00 LC a d 1 00 02 10 00 5 12 00 03 10 00 a 43 110 s 14 1 a 15 10 7 16 a D i TELE 17 4 FILE 8 18 1 CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 37 ia i G NN 4 4 CUE Menu See SSS aa 4 Enter the cue point data in the data entry window sbulyjas nusy p sajdeyo A with the numeric buttons then press the SET button For example to enter 00 01 30 00 press 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to 0 when you press the SET button PREV REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min Entered data TCR 00 00 00 00 I AM CUE TITLE 1 NEXT PAGE RAGE y 3 4 5 6 TELE FILE i CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR To modify current cue point data Press the or button enter the value to be added or subtracted then press the SET button The computation is performed and the results appear in the data entry window Press the ENTRY button to set the entered data The data are registered in the cue point data indication
101. 01404 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 off IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off To delete entered data Press the CLR button 6 6 Chapter 6 Editing SET is displayed CH CONI HOME PB EE GREEN PB PLAY LOCK TCR 2FD Fil ter On 04n 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 PLAYER lt 01404 58s 00 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 off IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off 5 Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button The time data for the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT point appears in the menu display About automatic split edit point setting Split editing requires a total of eight edit points four edit points for video editing IN and OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs and four edit points for audio editing AUDIO IN and OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs However as soon as you set five edit points the VTR automatically sets the remaining three points For example if you set three edit points for video or audio and two for audio or video the remaining three points are automatically set regardless of whether these point
102. 13 2 3 COMMECCOL Pan l vsceecisccccenccsscoacesccssevesvescsvsnesesesessessssonesiscbcesdessesters 2 14 Chapter 3 3 1 Po een es ae E EEE AEAEE Setting Up the VTR g Digital Connections ccceecceesceseeeseeetceeteeeteeeeeeeaes 3 1 2 Making HD Analog Connections 000 0 eee eeecesseceeneeceteeeeeees 3 2 3 1 3 Making NTSC PAL Digital Connections eee eeeeeeeeeee 3 3 3 1 4 Cascade CONNECTION eroista E a 3 4 3 2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System 3 5 3 2 1 Reference Signals for Output Video 0 eeeceeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 3 2 2 Reference Signals Connections 00 0 0 cceescceesteeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 3 3 Handling Cassettes csscscscssscssscsssseccscccssscsescssssscescesssessssssoess 3 8 3 3 1 Recommended Cassettes 20 0 cecesceseseeseeeeereeesecsseceseeeeeeeaes 3 8 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes ec ceeceesseeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeees 3 8 3 3 3 Preventing Accidental Erasure 0 eccceeccecssceesteceeneeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 4 1 1 Menu Configuration 2 0 00 cee eecceeesceceeeeeeeeeesaeceeaeceeaeeceeeeeeas 4 1 Menu Setungs 4 1 2 Changing Menu Settings 00 cece csceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeseeees 4 2 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF1 2 Menus eee eee eseeeseeeteeees 4 3 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function oe ceeeceeceeeeeeeeeseeenseeeaeens 4 4 4 1 5 Memory Card Function cee eseesseeseceseceseceneeeeeeseesaeenseeess 4 6 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data 0 0
103. 4 2 HOME Menu on page 4 14 TC menu Button Indication Function Settings F1 TIMER SEL Selects time data type CTL TC UBIT F2 TIMER RESET Resets the time counter E3 TIMER SET Sets the time data F4 TIMER HOLD Holds the time counter F5 TCR SEL Sets the time code reader VITC auto LTC E6 TCG SOURCE Selects the internal external time code generator int LTC int VITC ext LTC ext VITC F7 TCG MODE Sets the time code generator regene prst auto F8 RUN MODE Selects the running mode of the time code free rec F9 DF NDF Selects drop frame mode DF NDF auto F10 VITC Selects VITC input source TCG VIN ALT F1 TAPE TIMER Selects the CTL display mode 12H 24H ALT F2 PDPSET MENU Activates the menu for presetting the pull down when 23 98PsF time code 24PsF mode is selected ALT F3 TCCONV MENU Activates the menu for converting the time code when 25PsF 50i 24F to 25F mode is selected ALT F3 TCCONV MENU Activates the menu for converting the time code when 23 98PsF 25F to 24F 24PsF mode is selected ALT F4 PDTC DISP Specifies whether or not to display pull down time on off code ALT F5 PD CHARA Specifies superimposition of character information on off to the pull down output 4 20 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Button Indication Function Settings ALT F6 CHARA SUPER Specifies super
104. 4 58 00 ETT H M S F Lert INS TC Lett Recalling edit points LAST EDIT 4 19 Chapter 4 Menu Settings EE i ee WN 4 3 TC Menu To activate the TC menu Press the TC button The TC menu allows you to set time code related items through a single menu The HOME TC PF1 and PF2 menus show information that includes the VTR operation mode time code of the current position and the time code type etc To change the TC menu page Press the ALT button INTRP interpolation This appears when time code cannot be read correctly and correction has been performed TCR Time data type TIMER REMAIN T CTL TCR UBR TCG UBG DUR SEL L 113min Data entry window TCR ULIC VITC Time code type LTC VITC R B H F1 Field number F1 F2 AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 TIMER OUT 00 02 10 00 SET IN 00 01 10 00 DF This appears when drop frame AIN Time data for an AUDIO IN point mode data is being recorded or played TIMER sbulljes nueyy p Jejdeyo WA AOUT Time data for an AUDIO OUT point oto DF NDF IN Time data for an IN point OUT Time data for an OUT point Je hase cS RUN Toe wor vite vite int L Prst rec DF TCG TC Menu For details on operation modes refer to
105. 49 Chapter 4 Menu Settings sumas nuey p 19 dey9 f i suas nuey p sajdeyo NMI 4 4 CUE Menu To start the procedure over again Press the F9 CANCEL button to start again To change a character Press the N button to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed Then press the J or l button to move the insertion position 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the cut data was changed is displayed again To copy Cut data Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is to be pasted Then press the RCL button The cut data from the line above is copied to the selected line Changing scene data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed Then enter the characters using the numeric buttons and buttons Press the numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase letters A to J A maximum of three characters can be entered Or do the procedure below to change the data JO OO 9 00 aop m OO Ol 1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor wi
106. ACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the F9 CANCEL button to start again To change a character Press the A button to move the cursor to the comment to be changed Then press the I or button to move the insertion position If the entered text is longer than the comment box lt H or MP appears to the left or right of the box 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the comment data was changed is displayed again Prerolling to a cue point 1 Press the CUE SCAN button repeatedly to specify the direction in which the cursor moves when the PREROLL button is pressed Each press of the button changes the direction as follows FWD forward REW reverse gt unspecified FWD Pressing the PREROLL button causes the cursor to move to the next line and the VTR to preroll to the time code on that line Invalid time codes are ignored REW Pressing the PREROLL button causes the cursor to move to the previous line and the VTR to preroll to the time code on that line Invalid time codes are ignored 2 Press the PREROLL button 4 52 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Write protecting cue point data Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line that is to be write protected Then press the PROTECT button appears between the Time and Mrk columns to indicate that the time data mark data and recording
107. AUDIO OUT points IN paint OUT points AUDIO IN point IN points Automatically Corrected set edit point IN point You can select audio cut in crossfade and fade in out in edits as well as their duration in the VTR SETUP menu For details refer to the menu items in the 300 range in the VTR SETUP menu Using a VTR without the split editing function If the player VTR does not support the separate setting of edit points for video and audio you can set AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points on the recorder and three video edit points to enable split editing 6 1 5 Editing Non audio Data Before editing non audio data set item 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE in the VTR SETUP menu to cut edit Noise may be produced during editing of certain non audio data Chapter 6 Editing 6 7 Bupa 9 sedeyo HA 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 6 1 6 Confirming Edit Points Displaying the duration between two edit points The following six kinds of duration can be displayed in the time data display window e Between IN and OUT points e Between IN and AUDIO OUT points e Between IN and AUDIO IN points e Between OUT and AUDIO OUT points e Between OUT and AUDIO IN points e Between AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points Durations are calculated as follows e If both IN and OUT points are set the duration is the time between the points e If one of the edit points is not set the duration is set to 00 00 00 1 Press the RECORDER or PLA
108. Adjusts the sync phase prst 128 to 127 F10 FINE HD Fine adjustmentofthe sync phase prst Oto 1024 ALT F1 MASTER LEVEL D1 Adjusts the Y B Y and R Y output prst 0 0 to 141 3 levels simultaneously ALT F2 Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the Y output level prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F3 B Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the B Y outputlevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F4 R Y LEVEL D1 Adjusts the R Y outputlevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F5 VIDEO LEVEL D2 Adjusts the video level prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F6 CHROMA LEVEL D2 Adjusts the chromalevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 ALT F7 HUE D2 Adjusts the hue prst 30 to 30 ALT F8 SETUP LEVEL D1 D2 Adjuststhe setup level prst Oto 10 0 ALT F9 SYNC PHASE SD Adjusts the sync phase prst 128 to 127 ALT F10 FINE SD Fine adjustment of the sync phase prst 0 to 1024 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 55 a on E MN sum s nusy p 4ay deup WII 4 5 PF1 Menu Factory Settings 4 5 1 Selecting the Input Video Signal VIDEO IN Press the VIDEO IN button repeatedly to select the video signal to input SDI SDI video signal input to the HD SDIINPUT connector SDTI Only ifthe optional HKDV 506A SDTI Board isinstalled Dubbing signal 270 Mbps input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector The time codes to be recorded depend on the settings of the TC menu 4 5 2 Selecting the Reference Signal SERVO REF Press the SERVO REF button to select th
109. COMPOSITE SUPER connector 127 764 FINE SD 0 Makes fine adjustments to the sync phase of the D1 D2 preset 0 video signal output from D CONV SDI OUT OPTION 1024 connectors and analog composite video signal output from D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 765 CROSS COLOR 0 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 8 3 installed adjusts the image enhancer 15 766 H CROP POSITION 120 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 0 installed ad juststheimageenhancer Adjust sthe Hcr op 0 cropping position in the horizontal direction when using 120 edge crop mode 767 DETAIL GAIN 0 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 32 installed ad juststheimageenhance_r Adjusts the degree of 32 edge enhancement 127 768 LIMITER 0 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 32 i installed ad juststheimageenhancer Adjust sthe maxi mum 32 levelofthe detailaddedto enhance the original signal 63 769 CRISP THRESHOLD O When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 0 installed ad justs the image enhancer Sets the amplitude 15 fornotenhancing small amplitude signals A 37 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Item number ltem Seitable range Function 770 LEVEL DEPEND 0 When an
110. CT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette to clean the video and audio heads Read the instructions included with the cleaning cassette carefully as improper usage can damage the heads Follow the procedure below to clean the heads Insert the cleaning cassette The tape runs at normal playback speed for about 3 seconds as it cleans the heads The cleaning cassette is automatically ejected when the head cleaning finishes Do not run the cleaning tape more than 6 times in succession to avoid damaging the heads Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on cleaning the video and audio heads Moisture Condensation If you suddenly move the VTR from a cold location to a warm one or use the VTR in a very humid place moisture in the air can form on the head drum or tape guide This is called moisture condensation If you play a tape under these conditions the tape may adhere to the drum where moisture has collected and become damaged If moisture condenses on the head drum while you are operating the VTR the error message ERROR 10 appears in the time data display section DOLBY NR CH COND DIGITAL HOME PB EE KEY INH GREEN BASEBALL EDIT SET TC A ERROR 10 RECINH DEW DETECTED F Li ASSEM ATi r BLE Lr INS TC off INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off Time data display section
111. CUE connectors ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 2 3 4 CUE connectors and TIME CODE IN OUT connectors XLR 3 pin have gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan A 4 Appendix REF OUT BNC 2 1125 SYNC Trilevel SYNC 0 6 Vp p 75 Q sync negative AUDIO OUTPUT AES EBU BNC 2 CH1 2 and CH3 4 AES EBU format unbalanced AUDIO OUTPUT XLR 3 pin male 5 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 and CUE 4 dBm with 600 load low impedance balanced MONITOR OUTPUT XLR 3 pin female 2 4 dBm with a 600 Q load low impedance balanced TIME CODE OUT XLR 3 pin male 1 2 2 Vp p low impedance balanced LandR PHONES JM 60 stereo phone jack oto 12 dBu with an 8 Q load unbalanced Remote connectors CONTROL PANEL D sub 15 pin female REMOTE 1 IN D sub 9 pin female REMOTE 1 OUT D sub 9 pin female RS 232C D sub 25 pin female VIDEO CONTROL D sub 9 pin female for optional HKDV 503 PARALLEL I O SOP D sub 50 pin female with optional BKDW 509 which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world If using this unit with non Japanese specification equipment use male female adaptors Accessories supplied AC power cord 1 RCC SG 9 pin remote control cable 1 PSW 4 x 16 screws for rack mounting 4 SRAM 64 KB Memory card 1 Operation Manual 1 Maintenance Manual Part 1 1 Optional accessories HKDV 501A HD SD Cconverter Board HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Board HKDV 503 HD Digital Video Contro
112. CURRENT TC O01 OOm OOs QOF START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENTITO SEL Co E LE TC CONV on ORG TC DISP on 4 34 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 3 15 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 24F Mode TC CONV When the cassette tape recorded in 25F mode is played back in 24F mode off speed playback it is possible to convert 25 frame time code to the 24 frame time code To convert the time code follow the steps below 5 00 olo ogo a QO O 0O 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the F3 TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 3 Press the F3 TC CONV button to select on Each time you press the button on and off alternate on 25 frame time code is converted to 24 frame time code off 25 frame time code is not converted to 24 frame time code Notes e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 23 98PsF or 24PsF e This setting is effective only for the VITC and time code of SONY 9PIN protocol From the TIME CODE OUT connector 25 frames time code is output 4 4 CUE Menu The HDW F500 allows you to register up to 100 cue Doo points 0 to 99 and to manage cue points in groups of 10 per page Cue point settings deletions and page settings are done through the CUE
113. D button to select off Ol i N Check that no loop connections remain 6 3 Manual Editing Follow the procedure below to perform manual T Press the STOP button to stop the tape editing Note 2 1 To ensure a stable picture start playback at least three seconds before the IN point SONY H GOOSGSS rE ele 9900000 E 0220000 Of o a o o cio dho i oO oO ol g m o0 o 000e O g oio ogg a m l q 3 7 4 5 6 Manual editing 1 Enter jog or shuttle mode to position the tape at a place at least three seconds before the position at which you want to set an edit point 2 Press the AUTO button to turn it off 3 Press the F3 ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu or press the respective INSERT button F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS A CH1 INS A CH2 INS A CH3 INS A CH4 or INS CUE button to select the edit mode that you want 4 Press the PLAY button Playback starts 5 Press the REC EDIT button at the point where you want to start editing IN point The REC EDIT button lights and editing starts 6 Press the REC EDIT button where you want to end editing OUT point Editing ends but the tape continues to run in playback mode Chapter 6 Editing 6 1 9 Maintenance Head Cleaning Use the B
114. D TELE RIE CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN SCAN e LC TCR 00 00 00 00 LC TCR 00 00 00 00 ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Reet S04 ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLEINAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL POINT TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILLI nM L__ No Comment D COMMNT 1 pNoiss EDIT Coa 2 a2 3 D a C e CHANGE CHANGE 6 DATA DATA 7 C Cc DEL TAPE CUENUMWRITE DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM URITE POINT INFO POWNT EXIT POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT L_jt Ld L CACICA TELE FILE menu display 2 TELE FILE menu display 4 REC DATE Displays the date the memory label contents were last OTk modified Displays the take number of the cue point OTITLE Ocut Displays the cassette title Displays the cut number of the cue point OTime Scn Displays the time data of the cue point Displays the scene number of the cue point OMrk Comment Displays the cue point attribute OK NG KP no Displays the comment for a cue point attribute Recording start point setting Recording start points are indicated by an mark OIN Displays IN point data OUT Displays OUT point data 4 42 Chapter 4 Menu Settings TELE FILE menu Button Indication Function Fi CUE SCAN Specifies the direction ofthe cursormovement when the PREROLL button is pressed F2 ENTRY POINT Specifies whether IN and OUT point data are displayed or notin the TELE FILE menu F3 COMMNT EDIT Edits the co
115. E 4 3 10 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 25F Mode TC CONV When the cassette tape recorded in 24F mode is played back in 25F mode off speed playback it is possible to convert 24 frame time code to the 25 frame time code To convert the time code follow the steps below 5 to on 2 00 m ar Ol 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the F3 TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 3 Press the F3 TC CONV button to select on Each time you press the button on and off alternate on 24 frame time code is converted to 25 frame time code off 24 frame time code is not converted to 25 frame time code ua e This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 25PsF or 50i e This setting is effective only for the VITC and time code of SONY 9PIN protocol From the TIME CODE OUT connector 24 frames time code is output 4 3 11 Displaying the Pull Down Time Code when HKDV 507 507D is installed To display the pull down time code follow the steps below 1 Press the TC button then press the ALT button 3 Jol oin 0 8 9 a0 2 Press the PDTC DISP key to select on on Displays the pull down time code off Does not di
116. EEL TROUBLE 2 Slack in the tape was detected during searching rewinding or fast forward REEL TROUBLE 3 Slack in the tape was detected during playback or recording REEL TROUBLE 4 Abnormality in tape speed was detected during fast forward or rewinding REEL TROUBLE 5 Abnormality detected in the operation of S or T reels during cassette compartment operation Or current flow for S or T reels deviated from the fixed value TAPE TENSION ERROR Excessive tension detected during recording or playback CAPSTAN TROUBLE Abnormality detected in capstan motor operation DRUM TROUBLE Abnormality detected in drum motor operation TH UNTH MOTOR TIME OUT Abnormality detected during threading or unthreading THREADING TROUBLE Tape top process did not end normally during threading DEW DETECTED Condensation detected TAPE TOP END SENSOR TROUBLE Top and end of tape were detected simultaneously TAPE TOP SENSOR TROUBLE Trouble with the tape top sensor TAPE END SENSOR TROUBLE Trouble with the tap end sensor FAN MOTOR TROUBLE Abnormality detected in the operation of the fan motor CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MOTOR LOCK Abnormality detected during cassette compartment operation REEL SHIFT MOTOR LOCK Abnormality detected when moving the reel base corresponding to the cassette size REEL POSITION SENSOR TROUBLE Positions for L cassette and S cassette reel positions were detected simultaneously INTERNAL INTERFACE Abnormality detected in the communic
117. EMOTE 9 PIN off When this is setto on this unitis controlled from the on device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P OUT 9P connectors Note When this unitis controlled by a device connected to the REMOTE 1 IN 9P or PARALLEL I O 1 IN 50P connectors the editing control buttons and all ofthe tape transport buttons except STOP and EJECT are disabled It is also possible to make a setting so that all of the buttons are disabled For details see item 008 202 REMOTE 50 PIN off When this is setto on this unitis controlled from the on device connected to the REMOTE PARALLEL I O 50P connector optional BKDW 509 203 PARALLEL disable Selects whether two or more VTRs can be operated RUNNING enable synchronized disable Synchronized operation is not carried out enable Synchronized operationis enabled Forsynchronized operation to be possible item 203 must be setto enable on allofthe connected VTRs Appendix A 23 xipueddy Menu List Items Related to Editing 301 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number 301 Item EDIT OPERATION MODE Settable range film CG normal Function Selects the animation edit mode For normal editing use the normal setting film Selects editing in field units for film recording Since the standard film speed is 24 frames sec and VTR frame rate is 30 frames sec when th
118. ER 000123 hoi WRITE PROTECT ON how TAPE THREAD COUNT 123 b20 CUE POINT NUMBER 5 b20 CONTROL MODE panel SIZE 1024 USED 234 rs assor Dami TAPE INFORMATION l I ona w CHANGE DATA DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT CAEN To close the window Press the TAPE INFO button again To change ID or ADMIN data 3 Jo oin 0 8 9 aoc 1 Press the ALT F3 ATTRIB EDIT buttons Continued 4 53 Chapter 4 Menu Settings sumas nuey p 13 dey9 HW sbulyjas nuay p saldeyo A 4 4 CUE Menu SSS SSS a 2 Press the A or g button to select ID tape ID or To start the procedure over again ADMIN administrator then press the ENTRY Press the CANCEL button to start agai button To change a character Press the IA button to move the cursor to the data FORMAT CH COND ALT TELE FI ST oann to be changed Then press the K or l button to UNDO REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 move the insertion position ALL TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL ETE ATTRIB EDIT SELECT Scn 7 ATTR 3 oo time aot If entered text is longer than the ID or EDIT 20 M aol C 3 00 ADMIN ag ADMIN box ocuk se ees eres LEN TR Ros care R20 lt H or MP appears to the left or right of the
119. ESET Bank number of TENNIS the memory card Bt EG 8 ren SHOW ank 3 SETUP Blank 4 Blank 5 Blank 6 SHOW Blank 7 CUESET Blank 8 CL EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT D j 6 Press the COPY button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display T Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The VTR recalls the cue point list in the memory card After the recalling process is completed the name of the cue point list appears under the CURRENT CUESET indication 8 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before you pressed the ACCESS button appears again 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data When storing data to a memory bank in a memory card or the VTR you can add a title to the data to make data management easier IO oln 0 8 8 QO OO 46 1 3 Adding titles to the data 1 Move the cursor P to item to be filled 2 Press the EDIT TITLE button to display the EDIT TITLE widnow EDIT TITLE QIBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789 1 lt gt 0 x H4 amp N HDID2CAM D BACK SET SAVE SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL EXIT CJC EENE 3 Press the Kl or l button to select a letter
120. ETUP We menu SETUP menu E PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN button I A F6 VTR SETUP button gt j Menu configuration All items in the HOME TC and CUE menus can be duplicated and registered to the PF1 2 menus e Most items in the VTR SETUP menu can be registered to the PF1 2 menus Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 1 P Q am D Lm lt A D gt c V D mp gt Co sum s nusy p 4ay deup HN 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings oa E I a H a O OOE rd 4 1 2 Changing Menu Settings To activate the HOME TC CUE PF1 PF2 or SET UP menu press the respective menu button Menu items are assigned to function buttons F1 to F10 in each menu When two items are registered to the same function button you can display the second item by pressing the ALT button The example below describes the procedure for changing the setting specified by the ALT button and CAP LOCK button in the HOME menu 3 00 aln 2 90 a0 0000 0000 O Ol 00 0000 JEE 0000 m ooo m Changing menu settings 1 Press the HOME button The first page of the HOME menu appears in the display REMAIN T CH COND HOME PB EE L 113min GREEN PB PLAY LOCK TCR 2FD Fl O14 04m 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 Loft
121. Emphasis EMPHASIS To apply emphasis to a digital audio signal that has been converted from an analog input audio signal set the EMPHASIS button to on 4 60 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 6 3 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal MON L SEL MON R SEL The MON L SEL and MON R SEL buttons allow you to specify the audio channel to be output from the left and right MONITOR OUTPUT connectors respectively 1 Audiochannel 1 2 Audiochannel2 amp Audiochannel3 4 Audiochannel 4 5 Analogcuechannel When multiple channels are selected for a single connector all of the numbers are displayed Select the output signal to be monitored as follows Making the setting Follow the steps below to set the monitor output signal 1 Press the F9 MON L SEL or F10 MON R SEL button The setting display section lights up 2 Press numeric buttons 1 to 4 to select audio channels 1 to 4 or numeric button 5 for the analog cue channel Example Pressing numeric buttons 1 and 2 selects audio channels 1 and 2 leaving audio channels 3 and 4 and the analog cue channel off 12 appears in the display 3 To set the entered audio channels press the respective function button F9 or F10 4 7 SET UP Menu In the SET UP menu you can store and recall menu To activate the SET UP menu settings to and from the VTR memory banks and Press the SET UP button memory card register items to the PF menu and set items
122. FT button The VTR stores the cue point list to the memory card 8 Press the EDIT TITLE button to add a title to the cue point list For details refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 Preventing accidental erasure after saving settings Move the cursor P to the cue point set number you wish to save and press ALT PROTECT buttons A symbol will appear to the right of the cue point set number 9 Press the EXIT button The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before you pressed the ACCESS button appears again FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANK4 SETUP BANK 2 BASEBALL 0 FOOTBALL Ea Preset 1 1 Preset SHOW Preset 2 2 TENNIS SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset d TENNIS 4 4 Preset Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset L__ amp Preset EDIT JSELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT e 3 Press the DIRECTION button or press the lt or gt buttons twice to select the direction 4 Move the cursor to the memory card side using the lt button and use the A or M buttons to place the cursor gt by the memory bank where the settings were saved Recalling the contents of a memory card The contents stored in a memory card can be recalled
123. G 34HOURSI 26H1 Tepoetpauci Aoueuner 6H T SH OPERATION INFO FREQ 59 941 LINE 108031035 CONV OPTION MAINTE INFO EXEC ERTT Ll Ll LC 2 Press the F8 MAINTE EXEC button while holding down the SFT button CH COND MAINTENANCE TCR 00 00 00 00 MAINTENANCE ROM MAINT Lv operation 52SHOURS PANEL DRUM RUNNING 34HOURSL 26H MAINT TAPE TRAVEL 2OHOURSL 16H Cy THREADING 7B80TIMESL 449H Ww SERVO CHECK L DT SAT RF A U OTHERS EXIT CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK Lr LALALA 3 Press the F9 OTHERS CHECK button NURAM CH COND CTL v TCR 00 00 00 00 OTHERS CHECK OTHERS CHK m ak oO a lt CHECK nn An CN sna ROOM x m D i J HOURS PAPA I PAPA O SYSTEM EXIT METER SETUP SETUP MENU CoAC CAC J 5 8 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 4 Press the F9 SYSTEM MENU button ACTIVE CH COND SYSTEM MENU LINE Lott SYSTEM TF111080 1035 CONVERT FREQ F21SYSTEM FREQUENCY MODE MODE 59 94i D cony F31SDI OUT DI D2 sor F41META DATACFILM C C USER F81Cancel D1 F9 Execute of Reset UTR System META with conditions DATA STOP amp not STANDBY En EJECT Tape CANCEL EXEC EXIT CACC
124. HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is THRESHOLD installed adjusts the image enhancer Sets the luminance preset 8 8 range for edge enhancement 15 771 H DETAIL 2 6 MHz When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is FREQUENCY select 3 4 MHz installed adjusts the image enhancer Sets the center 3 9 MHz frequency for edge enhancement 4 6 MHz 772 H V RATIO 0 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Downconverter preset 3 Board is installed adjusts the image enhancer Sets the 3 horizontal to vertical ratio for edge enhancement 7 773 GAMMALEVEL 128 When an HKDV 501A optional HD SD Converter Board is preset 0 installed adjusts the image enhancer Adjusts the gradient 0 ofthe correction curve 128 775 VIDEO OUTPUT DATA 8bit Sets the bit size of the output data from video processing Tobit bit reduction processing 8bit When connected to an 8 bit system 10bit Whenconnectedtoa10 bitsystem e Make sure the bit length matches the destination device e This setting is only active when the HD SD converter outputis setto D1 776 DOWNCONVERTER disable Selects the HD SD converter mode when the INPUT INPUT CHECK ENABLE enable CHECK button onthe control panelis pressed disable The INPUT CHECK button is notlinked to downconverter output enable The INPUT CHECK button is linked to downconverter output When the INPUT CHECK button is pressed the input signal selected by the setting in item 701 is outputto the HD SD converter output
125. Hz 80 7mm s with the frame frequency of 25Hz 96 7mm s with the frame frequency of 30Hz Digital record playback time Using L size cassette 155 minutes with the frame frequency of 24Hz 149 minutes with the frame frequency of 25Hz 124 minutes with the frame frequency of 30Hz Fast forward rewind time Approx 3 minutes Using L size cassettes Tape speed A 2 Appendix Shuttle mode Still to approx 60 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 24Hz Still to approx 58 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 25Hz Still to approx 50 times normal playback speed with the frame frequency of 30Hz Variable mode 1 to 2 times normal playback speed Jog mode Still to 2 times normal playback speed Dynamic Tracking range to 2 times normal playback speed Load unload time 6 seconds or less Recommended tapes HDCAM cassette S and L sizes Search speed Digital video system Digital video signal format Sampling frequency Y 74 25 MHz Ps Pr 37 125 MHz Quantization 10 bits sample Compression 8 bits sample Compression Coefficient recording system Channel coding S NRZI PR IV Error correction Reed Solomon code Error concealment Adaptive three dimensional Analog composite output with optional HKDV 501A Bandwidth Y 0 to 5 75 MHz 0 5 dB 3 0 dB S N ratio 56 dB or more Y C delay 15 ns or less K factor 2T Pulse 1 or less Output SCH phas
126. I SNI SNI SNI SNI SNI WASSV HNIOSY 33 dad 3INOH 94 d Old 64 84 24 94 Sd td d Zd ld nud sbulyjas yJNeJag A10 9e4 SUOI OUNY jo ajqeL COVAAT IVICHMENTWSRRAOS ELSA HU GHA AAsheisAROeAe BHCUTWES REDT SHOMAGLICRMCHEBLEY GRAD GRE R TS CRESBMCHKVIATIVERATSCCERIELET The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Le mat riel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en informations qui sont la propri t de Sony Corporation et sont destin es exclusivement a l usage des acqu reurs de l quipement d crit dans ce manuel Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi pour tout autre but que des op rations ou entretiens de l quipement a moins d une permission crite de Sony Corporation Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus Informationen die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind und ausschlieBlich zum Gebrauch durch den Kaufer der in dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausr stung bestimm
127. IDEO CASBETTE RECORDER HOW Ho0 HDCAM Em ast m OoOo0o0oo0o00 o goga oja 209000 o codaal of 2 OOOO Co a oGSS5 5 old 29 0 2000 0 g OO 00 O _ _ oo o OO0 Ojo goood 2 mnoooo0o CoG 1al oO Recording 1 Check that the REC INHIBIT indicator is off then insert a cassette For details on inserting a cassette see Section 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes on page 3 8 2 Press the PLAY button while holding down the REC button Recording starts and the SERVO indicator lights up to indicate that the servo is locked 3 Press the STOP button to stop recording If the recording continues to the end of the tape If item 407 AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP menu is set to ON then the tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and stops Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 5 yoeghe q 6uipiooey S saydeyp yoeghe q Bulpio99y G Jajdeyo 5 3 Preparing for Playback 5 3 1 Setting Switches and Menus Before starting playback set the switches and menus as shown in the diagram below For details refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses POWER switch ON AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons Audio channels to be monitored page 5 2 DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER HDWF500 REMOTE buttons None of these buttons light up PB level controls Playback level 0 20 12 9 lt a0 gt
128. IN CH3 Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 3 ae When the dubbing signal inputto the F4 A IN CH4 Selects the audio input signal for audio channel 4 SDTI OPTION IN connector is selected forthe input video signal the SDTI signal input to the SDTI OPTION INconnectoris automatically selected forthe input audio signal as well The setting can not be changed F7 EMPHASIS Sets the emphasis off on F9 MON L SEL Selects the monitor output signal for channel L Combination of 1 2 3 4 5 F10 MON R SEL Selects the monitor output signal for channel R Combination of 1 2 3 4 5 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 59 a ae NN sum s nusyy p 4ay deup Nhl 4 6 PF2 Menu Factory Settings 4 6 1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal A IN CH 1 CH4 Function buttons A IN CH1 to A IN CH4 select the audio input signal for the various channels SDI Selects the audio signal input through the HD SDI INPUT connector AES EBU Selects the audio signal inputthrough the AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors areg Selectstheaudiosignalinputthroughthe AUDIO INPUT connectors SDT Only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Boardisinstalled When the SDTI signal input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector is selected for the input video signal the audio signal input to the SDTI OPTION IN connector is automatically selected for the input audio signal as well SDTI is displayed and can not be changed 4 6 2 Setting
129. IN OUT A 26 Function buttons 2 6 H HD SDI INPUT connectors 2 15 HD SDI OUTPUT connectors 2 15 Head cleaning A 1 HOME menu 4 14 Index l 1 x pul WA Index IN OUT buttons 2 8 Indicator window 2 3 INPUT CHECK button 2 8 INPUT SELECT button 2 4 Improving vertical resolution 5 9 Insert editing 4 17 6 3 Inserting VITC 4 26 J K L JOG button 2 11 Jog mode playback 5 12 MAINTENANCE A 1 MAINTENANCE switch 2 6 Manual editing 6 19 Memory card adding titles 4 11 data compatibility 4 13 formatting 4 6 insertion slot 2 6 recalling 4 9 recalling cue point list 4 10 storing 4 7 storing cue point lists 4 8 MEMORY CARD indicator 2 6 Memory label 1 2 4 41 A 5 Menu configuration 4 1 changing settings 4 2 CUE menu 4 35 HOME menu 4 14 list A 15 PANEL SETUP menu 4 65 PF1 menu 4 55 PF2 menu 4 59 registering items to the PF1 2 menus 4 3 MLB 1B 100 1 2 4 41 A 5 Moisture condensation A 1 MONITOR OUTPUT connectors 2 16 MONITOR SELECT button 2 3 Monitoring video and audio signals being recorded 5 4 N NDF Non drop frame mode 4 25 4 26 Non audio data editing 6 7 playing back 5 16 selecting as the audio input signal 5 3 Normal speed playback 5 11 l 2 Index O Operation information A 6 Outputting still pictures 4 17 Overview automatic editing 6 1 DMC editing 6 15 DMC playback 5 13 P Q PARALLEL I O 50P connector 2 16 Pausing the current time 4 24 PB audio output l
130. L audio CTL gt The record inhibit area is selected using the 003 REC INHIBIT AREA select setting in the VTR SETUP menu all All recording is prohibited The REC INHIBIT indicator will be lit crash REC The normal record mode is disabled Use this setting when you want to record only during assemble editing or insert editing video CTL Video and CTL signal recording is inhibited Audio CTL Audio and CTL signal recording is inhibited casst This is displayed when recording is inhibited because the record protect plug is set This setting cannot be selected tO OO 0 00 oO OO Ol a o m 0O REC INHIBIT indicator 4 2 3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel ASSEMBLE or INS CUE Select assemble or insert edit mode Selecting assemble edit mode Press ASSEMBLE in the HOME menu Selecting the insert edit mode Press one of the following buttons in the HOME menu F4 INS TC F5 INS VIDEO F INS A CH1 E7 INS A CH2 F8 INS A CH3 F9 INS A CH4 INS CUE For more information about editing operations refer to Chapter 6 Editing on page 6 1 4 2 4 Preread Settings PRE READ This setting allows pre reading reading before writing in insert edit mode To select pre reading press the ALT PRE READ button Pressing the button cycles the settings from off video audio a v off No pre reading video Pre read
131. LL 0 d FOOTBALL Preset 1 1 Preset SHOW Preset 2 2 Preset SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset Preset 4 4 Preset Ld Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset L__ Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT a j 3 Press the FT FORMAT CARD button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 4 Press the FT FORMAT CARD button while holding down the SFT button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display again 5 press the FT FORMAT CARD button while holding down the SFT button The VTR starts formatting the card To cancel formatting Press the CLR button while the confirmation message appears in the display Move the cursor to the VTR side using the button and use the A and M buttons to move the cursor to the memory bank where the data is to be saved Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to a memory card FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD TENNIS TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANK4 SETUP BANK 2 BASEBALL 0 FOOTBALL Preset 1 SHOU Preset 2 Destination SETUP Preset 3 rese Preset 4 4 Preset Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset L__ Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC
132. NVERSION at 25F off speed PB off on Specifies whether or not to convert the 24 frames time code to the 25 frames time code when off speed playing back the cassette tape recorded in the 24F mode with the 25F mode off Does not convert the 24 frames time code to the 25 frames time code on Converts the 24 frames time code to the 25 frames time code This setting is only active when the field frequency is 25 Hz 631 ORIGINAL TC display off on When item 630 is set to on this setting specifies whether the 24 frame time code is displayed or not on the control panel of the VTR before conversion off The 24 frame time code is not displayed before conversion on The 24 frame time code is displayed before conversion The type of time code type displayed is specified by item 603 632 JUMPING TC select 3H 1H 1H 2H 3H OH When the 24 frame time code is converted to 25 frame time code this setting specifies the loopback point JUMPING TC with respect to the reference point for conversion STARTING TC 3H The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours before STARTING TC 2H The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours before STARTING TC 1H The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour before STARTING TC 1H The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour after STARTING TC 2H The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours after STARTING TC 3H The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours after STARTING TC OH
133. P button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The STOP button operates in remote control mode PLAY disable disable The PLAY button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The PLAY button operates in remote control mode REC EDIT disable disable The REC EDIT button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The REC EDIT button operates in remote control mode STANDBY disable disable The STANDBY button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The STANDBY button operates in remote control mode EJECT disable disable The EJECT button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The EJECT button operates in remote control mode JOG disable disable The JOG button is disabled in remote control mode enable enable The JOG button operates in remote control mode SHUTTLE disable disable The SHUTTLE button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The SHUTTLE button operates in remote control mode VAR disable disable The VAR button is disabled in remote control mode enable enable The VAR button operates in remote control mode PREROLL disable disable The PREROLL buttonis disabled in remote control enable mode enable The PREROLL button operates in remote control mode PREVIEW disable disable The PREVIEW REVIEW button is disabled in REVIEW enable remote control mode enable The PREVIEW REVIEW button operates in remote control mode AUTO disable disable The AUTO button is disabled
134. R LINE SELECT and T04 INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR The T02 INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR HD settings and display information Setting of item T02 Displayed information off off COLOR BARS CB MULTIBURST MB 10 STEPS 10STP PULSE amp BAR P amp BAR RAMP RAMP BLACK BLACK The T03 INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR LINE SELECT settings and display information Setting of item T03 Displayed information 1035 1035 1080 1080 This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz The T04 INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR settings and display information Setting of item T04 Displayed information off off silence silnc 1 kHz sine 1kHz Display priority of display messages Messages are displayed in the following order of priority Error messages 4 Lost lock messages 4 Warning messages 4 Player edit points and time data 4 Operation information 4 Pull down time data when optional HKDV 507 507D HD Pull Down Board is installed Or 24 frame time data when playback in 25 frame mode off speed playback is selected Appendix A 7 xipueddy Error Messages and Warning Messages Error Messages When the unit ceases to opc jte correctly due to malfunction or an internal system error the alarm will sound and an error message will be displayed on the display Only one messag
135. REC video Recording disabled Lit flashing CTL audio CTL Recording allowed Unlit Lit flashing off Recording disabled Recording allowed Unlit a Toggle between lit flashing settings is possible using the 104 REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING setting in the VTR SETUP menu Recording editing and selection of assemble and insert modes are possible only when the indicator is off 2 1 5 Lower Control Panel Search Operations Section VAR button JOG button SHUTTLE button DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDERHDW F500 HDCAM fissen amp Search dial Lower control panel search operations section VAR button Press to select variable speed playback mode for noiseless playback in a maximum range of 1 to 2 times normal playback speed in 51 steps Playback exceeding this speed range is not possible The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and normal playback speed JOG button Press to select jog mode In this mode the button lights up and playback at 1 to 1 or 2 to 2 times normal playback speed is possible determined by the 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR SETUP menu In this mode the search dial does not click SHUTTLE button Press to enter shuttle mode In this mode the button lights and playback corresp
136. Reads LTC Depending on the time code recorded on a tape VITC or LTC appears on the display Time codes that are read by the time code reader or played back are output from the TIME CODE OUT connector 4 3 3 Setting the Time Code Generator TCG SOURCE MODE There are two ways to record time codes on the VTR One way is to record the output of the VTR s internal time code generator The other is to directly record time codes that are input from an external time code generator The output from the internal time code generator can either be set to a specified initial value or synchronized with an external time code generator The internal time code generator time code settings are made with the TCG SOURCE TCG MODE buttons Menu selections and settings are shown below Menu Fe TCG F7 TCG SOURCE MODE Setting TCG Internal TCG Preset Time codes can be freely set using the internal time code generator Internal int LTC regene Lock to the time TCG data recorded Regenerate on the time code tracks Lock to the time data recorded as video AUX data on the tape int VITC regene ext LTC Lock to the time data on the TIME CODE IN connector regene ext VITC Lock to the time data in the video signal on the HD SDI INPUT connector auto int LTC regene is set in assemble or insert mode and prst is set in other modes regene
137. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the F5 SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the F6 BACK SPACE button to go back FORMAT CH COND ALT TELE FI T Fil TCR 00 00 00 00 UNDO REC DATE 1998 02 101 Rest 50 ALL TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILLI po ATTRIB EDIT SELECT Scn 0 00 A01 ATTR i 1 00 TITLE aol EDIT 2o z aol 3 00 ADMIN aol 4 00 B20 copy 5 00 Press ENTRYIto edit B20 toCUE 6 Press CLRI to CANCEL T Fil WRITE MODE PRTEC Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the CANCEL button to start again To change a character 3 Press the Kl or button to select a character EDIT TITLE E QBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789 1 lt gt 0 H48 _ HD1ID2CAM BACK SET SAVE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT ee L 4 44 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Press the A button to move the cursor to the title box Then press the K or l button to change the insertion position If entered title exceeds the length of the title box lt H or E gt appears to the left or right of the box Press the SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the title was entered is displayed again Changing time data T
138. SONY HD DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER HDW F500 PARALLEL INTERFACE KIT BKDW 509 HD SD CONVERTER BOARD HKDV 501A HD LINE CONVERTER BOARD HKDV 502 HD DIGITAL VIDEO CONTROLLER HKDV 503 SDTI BOARD HKDV 506A HD PULL DOWN BOARD HKDV 507 507D A s44 lele File OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition Revised 3 Serial No 10101 and Higher WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard do not expose the unit to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA ONLY If used in USA use the UL LISTED power cord specified below DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD Plug Cap Parallel Blade with ground pin NEMA 5 15P Configuration Cord Type SJT three 16 or 18 AWG wires Length Less than 2 5m 8 ft 3 in Rating Minimum 10 A 125 V Using this unit at a voltage other than 120V may require the use of a different line cord or attachment plug or both To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock refer servicing to qualified service personnel For the customers in U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are d
139. START TC Press to enter the current time ENT code as the 24F STARTING TC F8 JUMP TC SEL Selects the 24F JUMPING TC as an interval from 24F STARTING TC Selectable values 3H 2H 1H 1H 2H 3H OH F10 EXIT Select to exit the TC CONVERT menu 4 28 Chapter 4 Menu Settings To preset the 24F STARTING TC using the numeric buttons o oloo oh 0 010 49 9 200 joo ee a 200 0oJj uo0ol 0 e e 2 000g o ooooo00 a n 0 aale a 1 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with the numeric buttons TC CONVERT REMAIN T CH COND L_113min GREEN Data entry window TCR 00 00 00 00 004 00 00s O0 24F JUMPING TC coN 214 00m 00s OOF ORG TC 24F CURRENT TC ean O04 OOm OOs OOr START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENT TC SEL a S i 4 Press the SET button to set the time code REMAIN T CH COND L 113min GREEN TC_CONVERT TCR 00 00 00 00 24F STARTING TC O14 00m OOs QOF 24F JUMPING TC et 224 OOn OOs OOF on ORG TC 24F CURRENT TC ree O04 OOm OOs OOF START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENTI TC SEL Co E L
140. T AES EBU connectors are recorded SDI CH12 AES CH34 MODE7 Channels 1 and 2 of the signal input from the HD SDI INPUT connector andthe channels 3 and 4 of the signal input from the AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connector are recorded SDI CH34 AES CH12 MODE8 Channels 3 and 4 of the signal input from the HD SDI INPUT connector andthe channels 1 and 2 of the signal input from the AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connector are recorded 821 AUDIO ADVANCE MODE off Specifies whether or notthe phase of the audio output signal is shifted 1 frame ahead of the video output signal off The phase of the audio output signalis not shifted on The phase of the audio output signal is shifted 1 frame ahead of the video output signal Note that the phase is shifted for allaudio channels When edit presetis setto ON HDW F500 operates internally with off setting Appendix A 41 xipueddy Menu List Items Related to Digital Processing 901 The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings Item number 902 Item FREEZE MODE Settable range field field1 field2 frame1 2 frame2 1 Function Specifies the freeze still picture mode and freeze timing during manual freezing by REMOTE1 9P or REMOTE2 50P connector onthe control panel or automatic freezing field Freezes the odd or even field depending on the timing in freeze mode field1 Freezes the firs
141. TC F6 START TC Press to preset the 25F PST STARTING TC using the numeric buttons F7 START TC Press to enter the current time ENT code as the 25F STARTING TC F8 JUMP TC SEL Selects the 25F JUMPING TC as an interval from 25F STARTING TC Selectable values 3H 2H 1H 1H 2H 3H OH F10 EXIT Select to exit the TC CONVERT menu Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 33 o on S ii sbullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu To preset the 25F STARTING TC using the numeric buttons Jol oo 4 9 9 o gt UO OO 3 OOOOOO Ho o o0 1 Press the TC button and then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 2 Press the TCCONV MENU button The TC CONVERT menu appears 3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with the numeric buttons REMAIN T CH COND TC CONVERT L 113min GREEN Data entry window TCR 00 00 00 00 OOn OOn 00 00 25F JUMPING TC conu 214 00m 00s OOF on ORG TC 25F CURRENT TC a O04 00m OOs OOF START START JUMP EXIT TC PST TC ENT TC SEL Lo E LE He 4 Press the SET button to set the time code REMAIN T CH COND L_113min GREEN TC_CONVERT TCR 00 00 00 00 25F STARTING TC O14 00m OOs QOF 25F JUMPING TC 224 00m 00s OOF 25F
142. TC Insertion Line VITC POS 1 POS 2 VITC signals can be inserted at two positions in the output signal from the HD SD converter 5 Jol oo 4 9 9 0 gt 13 2 Setting the VITC insertion line VITC POS 1 POS 2 T Press the ALT button then the VITC POS 1 button The setting display part is lit 2 Press the A or M button to change the value You can also use the or button 3 Press the E9 VITC POS 1 button The data setting is completed and the setting display disappears Switching to another menu also completes the setting display disappears Following the same steps but using the VITC POS 2 button VITC can be inserted on another line 4 3 14 Presetting for Conversion From 25 frame Into 24 frame Time Code TCCONV MENU When the VTR is operated in 23 98PsF 24PsF mode follow the steps below to make the settings for 24 frame converted time code 5 Iolo 39 0 The table below shows an example of how the 24 frame time code is not consecutive when 25F STARTING TC is set to 01 00 00 00 and 25F JUMPING TC is set to 22 00 00 00 i e JUMP TC SEL is set to 3H 25 Frames TC 24 Frames TC JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 22 52 30 00 01 00 01 24 01 00 01 00 Forward direction 01 00 00 23 01 00 00 23 STARTING TC 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 59 24 00 00 59 23 Reverse direction i
143. Time Code Generator TCG SOURCE MODE 4 25 4 3 4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode RUN MODE 4 25 4 3 5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode DF NDP eee 4 25 4 3 6 Inserting VITC input source VITO o e 4 26 4 3 7 Selecting CTL Display Mode TAPE TIMER sees 4 26 4 3 8 Presetting Pull Down Time Code PDPSET MENU when HKDV 507 507D is installed cccccceeeseeceeeeeees 4 26 4 3 9 Presetting for Conversion From 24 frame Into 25 frame Time Code TCCONV MENU 0 cee eececsseeseceseceseeeseeeaeeenaeeaeeees 4 27 4 3 10 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 25F Mode TE CONV Ditch teed Abe hae vacated ties talons ooo ES 4 29 4 3 11 Displaying the Pull Down Time Code when HKDV 507 507D is installed eeceecesseeeeeees 4 29 4 3 12 Superimposition of Character Information PD CHARA CHARA SUPER H POS V POS e eee 4 30 4 3 13 Setting the VITC Insertion Line VITC POS 1 POS 2 4 32 4 3 14 Presetting for Conversion From 25 frame Into 24 frame Time Code TCCONV MENU 0 e cee eececsseeseceseceseeseeeneeeaeeseenes 4 33 4 3 15 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 24F Mode CIC CONN emu Aas et eedaiael ca seni a a a 4 34 4 4 CUE Men scacssise avesatecessnscenssvaveasssnbsssessedenasenveseesabassbastiuovenanasusseeaes 4 35 4 4 1 Selecting a Multi Cue Mode eeeeeeeseeereesseceneeeseeenes 4 36 4 4 2 Registering Cue Points 2 0 eee ceecceceeceeseeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 36 4 4 3 Erasing Cue Po
144. W F500 as the player and an NTSC PAL digital device as the recorder set 005 SERVO AV REFERENCE select in the VTR SETUP menu to external and set 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select to extern SD 3 3 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR YLA 34 dn Bumes g sajdeyo NN YLA eul dn Bum s g seldeyo HA 3 1 Connecting External Equipment G UUE E UU 3 1 4 Cascade connection This example shows how to connect multiple HDW F500 VTRs together for simultaneous recording HDW F500 Player HD SDI OUTPUT TIME CODE OUT BNC cable HDW F500 Recorder TIME CODE IN eal HD SDI INPUT Oo Z Y Digital video distributor HKPF 103M HD SDI OUTPUT TIME CODE OUT Video monitor HD serial monitor TIME CODE IN HDW F500 Recorder HD SDI INPUT Doo SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP On the recording VTRs set 613 TC OUTPUT menu to through 3 4 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System This section describes how reference signals for t
145. YER button to select the VTR for which you want to confirm a duration The button lights up N Hold down any two IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT buttons The duration between the points corresponding to the two buttons is displayed The value can be negative TIMER CH COND TR SEL GREEN TC PLAY LOCK DUR VITC 100 OT 00s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 Duration eae IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 between two C edit points TIMER HOLD TC TCG TCG RUN SEL souRce mope mope PF NDF VITC vite int erst rec df TCG Displaying the duration between two edit points 6 8 Chapter6 Editing 6 1 7 Cuing Up and Prerolling You can preroll the tape to a point prior to the edit start point preroll point or cue up the tape to any edit point Follow the procedure below to cue up or preroll the tape Cuing up and prerolling 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR which you want to operate The button lights up 2 To cue up the tape to an edit point Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the PREROLL button The tape moves to the edit point corresponding to the button then stops To preroll the tape Press the PREROLL button The tape is rewound to a point before the edit start point by the amount determined by the preroll time setting
146. ains the adjustment menu for video signals If you later use the PF1 menu to register items from other menus you can restore the PF1 menu to its original factory settings by recalling SETUP BANK ig from the VTR memory VTR Memory Bank Function on page 4 4 To activate the PF1 menu screen Press the PF1 button banks UIDEO REMAIN T CH COND PFi IN L 113min TCR Fii a Oe F1 4 004 00m 00s OO Rou H M S F Ereng AIN AOUT IN QUT MASTER HD T PB PR SETUP H PHAS FINE HD HD HD HD HD HD Prst Prst erst prst Prst Prst PF1 menu display PF1 menu factory settings Button Indication Function Settings F1 VIDEO IN Selects the inputvideo signal SDI SDTI The SDTI selection is operative only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Boardis installed F2 SERVO REF Selects the reference signal for ext input auto output F4 MASTER LEVEL HD Adjuststhe Y Ps andProutputlevels prst 0 0 to 141 3 simultaneously E5 Y LEVEL HD Adjusts the Y outputlevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 F6 Ps LEVEL HD Adjuststhe P soutputlevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 F7 Pr LEVEL HD Adjuststhe P routputlevel prst 0 0 to 141 3 F8 SETUP LEVEL HD Adjusts the setup level prst 10 0 to 10 0 F SYNC PHASE HD
147. analog ch 1 ch 2 As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2 preset 314 ANALOG AUDIO no definition Sets the channel 4 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF EDIT PRESET analog ch 1 according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor REPLACE FOR analog ch 2 or remote controller CH 4 analog ch 1 ch 2 no definition Not defined analog ch 1 As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset analog ch 2 As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset analog ch 1 ch 2 As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2 preset 315 ANALOG AUDIO no definition Sets the analog audio channel longitudinal edit preset of EDIT PRESET analog ch 1 the VTR to ON or OFF according to the analog audio preset REPLACE FOR analog ch 2 specified on an editor or remote controller CUE analog ch 1 ch 2 no definition Not defined analog ch 1 As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset analog ch 2 As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset analog ch 1 ch 2 As determined by analog channel 1 or analog ch 2 preset A 25 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Item number Item Settable range Function 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE cut edit cross fade fade in out Specifies the type of editing for digital audio signals cut edit Cut editing discontinuity in audio signal may result at the join causing noise cross fade Cross fade see figure below fade in out Fade out and
148. and audio input impedance is high approximately 20 kQ Use OFF for high input levels when Audio input level is 4 dBu line input and audio input impedance is high approximately 20 kQ Use ON for high input levels when Audio input level is 4 dBm line input and audio input impedance is 600Q ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors XLR 3 32 Accepts up to five analog audio signal lines channels 1 to 4 and cue ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT connectors XLR 3 31 Outputs up to five analog audio signal lines channels 1 to 4 and cue O CONTROL PANEL connector 15 pin Connects the control panel through the 15 pin cable when using the control panel is used as a remote controller REMOTE1 IN 9P OUT 9P connectors D sub 9 pin Used with the included 9pin remote control cable to connect two HDW F500 VTRs or a second HD VTR when a BVE900 910 2000 9000 9100 series BVE Editing Control Unit is used for editing Used when you edit using two VTRs and the BVE 900 910 2000 9000 9100 Editing Control Unit The REMOTE1 IN and OUT connectors can be used to make a bridge connection 2 1 6 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls MONITOR OUTPUT connectors XLR 3 31 Outputs signals for audio monitoring These connectors output two signal lines L and R Select the signals to be output with the MONITOR SELECT buttons and the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons on the upper control panel A setting can be made so that volum
149. ata using the numeric buttons 5 Jol oo 4 9 9 ao0b o00000 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section to be entered or modified To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time data in the data entry window and then press the SET button For example to enter 00 01 30 00 press the numeric buttons as follows 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 There is no need to enter the first zero When you enter a number that is less than eight digits long the unspecified digits are automatically set to zero when the SET button is pressed CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN SET 00 01 30 00 Entered time C TCR 00 00 00 00 data ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL No Time Mrk IN 0 00 01 02 03 NG 00 01 01 03 ne tp KP anna ienie EDIT 2 00 03 04 03 OK 00 03 03 03 3 00 04 04 03 OK 00 04 03 03 4 00 05 05 03 NG 00 05 04 03 CHANGE 5 00 06 06 03 OK 00 06 05 03 DATA TE DEL MARK PRO TAPE CUENUM WRITE POINT TECT INFO POINT EXIT 3 Press the
150. atic editing press the AUTO button turning it on then press the REC EDIT button During editing the indicator above the REC EDIT button lights up and goes off at the end AUTO button PREVIEW REVIEW button 1001010 0 8 2 a0 OoOooooo REC EDIT button OUT button ENTRY button Performing automatic editing To stop automatic editing Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button The point where the buttons are pressed is treated as an OUT point and editing stops To confirm the results of the editing Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button to confirm the edit results When the preview ends the tape rewinds to the OUT point then stops Chapter 6 Editing 6 13 Bupa 913 dey9 qT 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing a _______________ Modifying edit points for automatic editing later After you perform automatic editing the time data of IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points remain stored in memory The stored data can be later used to modify edit points or to execute automatic editing again Follow the procedure below to modify edit points after executing automatic editing 5 Iolo 39 0 Dig BEA Modifying edit points for automatic editing later 1 In HOME menu press the ALT button and then the LAST EDIT button The edit points used in the last automatic edit are restored
151. ation section on the lower control panel Menu items are divided among six different menus HOME TC CUE PF1 PF2 SET UP Of these menus the PF1 PF2 Personal Function menus can be used to register frequently used menu items from the other menus allowing faster setting of VTR operating conditions Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu settings The contents of the eight VTR memory banks can in turn be stored on a memory card for later recall 4 1 1 Menu Configuration This VTR has two kinds of menus PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu This menu contains items that can be registered to the PF1 2 menus Press the PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN button in the SET UP menu to display this menu For details on registering items in the PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu to the PF 1 2 menus see Section 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF 1 2 Menus on page 4 3 VTR SETUP menu This menu contains items that specify the initial operating conditions of the VTR You can change these settings directly without registering the items to the PF1 2 menus Press the VTR SETUP button in the SET UP menu to display this menu For details on setting operating conditions of the VTR see Section 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu on page 4 61 The menu configuration of the VTR is shown in the figure below HOME menu PF182 ASSIGN TC menu SSIGN menu PF1 menu Registration PF2 menu CUE menu VTR S
152. ation with the CPU on the circuit board CPU INITIALIZE ERROR When the unit was powered up an abnormality was detected in the initial communication with the CPU SV NV RAM TROUBLE An abnormality was detected while reading servo adjustment data after the unit was turned on READ WRITE ERROR Error occurred during reading and writing to the SS 88 on board RAM SY ROM ERROR Error detected while reading system computer ROM data when the unit was turned on 8 Appendix A2 DR NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR Error detected while reading machine type data when the unit was turned on A3 SYS NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR Error detected while reading menu settings data when the unit was turned on A4 PLAYER CONTROL COMMAND BUFFER FULL The 9 pin serial communication send buffer for player control is full A5 RS 422 REMOTE COMMAND BUFFER FULL The 9 pin serial communication receive buffer is full BO DT HARD ERROR Error detecting during DT distortion removal B1 TCG HARD ERROR Possibly a hardware error in the time code generator circuit or peripheral hardware B2 DCP 26 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR The two DCP 26 boards are installed B3 DCP 26 amp PD 94 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR The DCP 26 board and PD 94 board are installed to the wrong position Appendix A 9 xipueddy Error Messages and Warning Messages Warning Messages When one of the problems described below is detected a warning mark is displayed in the upper left corner of the display Ope
153. ator goes off before the tape passes the OUT point The VTR has reached its storage capacity and cannot store any more playback speed variations To exit DMC editing mode Press the ALT DMC buttons in HOME menu 6 16 chapter6 Editing Performing DMC editing After setting the playback speeds in preview mode press the RECORDER button and REC EDIT button DMC editing is performed at the playback speed s stored in memory PREVIEW REVIEW button Performing DMC editing To confirm the results of DMC editing Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button 6 2 2 Animation Editing Animation editing is a form of insert editing which makes it easier to record a succession of still frames in fixed field or frame units The procedure for editing after selecting animation editing is exactly the same as for normal insert editing To select animation editing use item 301 EDIT OPERATION MODE in the VTR SETUP menu normal Selects normal insert editing CG Selects editing in frame units principally for recording computer graphics CG When the edit completes the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point and the next OUT point is set automatically with 1 frame added film Selects editing in field units for film recording Since the standard film speed is 24 frames sec and VTR frame rate is 30 frames sec when the frame frequency is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz the duration must be alter
154. box C T Fil WRITE 6 MODE PRTEC Press the SAVE EXIT button L m The screen that was on before the cut data was changed is displayed again 3 Press the Kl or button to select a character i ABC DEF GHIJKLMNOPQRSTUUWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 5 5 SHA R TL Sw td HD1D2CAM BACK SET SAVE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT ee LC 4 Press the F7 SET LETTER button or the center cursor button The selected character is entered BE AGC DEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZ abcdefshjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 7 51 U48 _ HDID2CAM BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL EXIT EI 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the F5 SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the F6 BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character 4 54 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 5 PF1 Menu Factory Settings For details on registration methods see Section 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF 1 2 Menus on page 4 3 and on restoring factory set menu items see Section 4 1 4 The PF Personal Function 1 menu is used to register frequently used menu items When shipped from the factory the PF1 menu cont
155. c still picture mode in search mode and the change to tape 40 sec protection mode 50 sec The selectable range of time is from 0 5 second to 30 minutes 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 30 min 502 TAPE step fwd Specifies the tape protect mode the VTR changes from still PROTECTION standby off picture mode while searching MODE SEARCH tension release The unit enters automatically the specified tape protect mode after the time specified in item 501 has elapsed step fwd A two second step advance is repeated in forward direction at 1 30 times normal tape speed standby off The VTR enters standby off mode standby is canceled tension release The VTR enters tension release mode tape tension is released 503 TAPE standby off Specifies the tape protect mode the VTR changes to from PROTECTION tension release the stop mode MODE FROM The unit automatically enters the specified tape protect STOP mode after the elapse of time specified by the item 501 standby off The VTR enters standby off mode standby is canceled tension release The VTR enters tension release mode tape tension is released 504 DRUM ROTATION off Sets the drum rotation to on or off during standby off mode IN STANDBY OFF jon off Drum rotation is stopped on Drum rotation continues 505 STILL TENSION normal Sets the tape tension control in still picture mode loose normal Maintains the tape tension that ensures uneffected playback even in
156. cator Flashes when the communication between the VTR and the control panel is abnormal 2 1 3 Lower Control Panel Editing Operations Section Numeric buttons and buttons SFT button RCL button CLR button SET button C O TE Toe PREREAD indicator AUDIO IN OUT buttons PLAYER RECORDER buttons IN OUT buttons INPUT CHECK button ENTRY button AUTO button Cursor control buttons Lower control panel editing operations section Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 7 S 0 U00 pUe Sued JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo NN 0UOD pue Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 19 deyo NN 2 1 Control Panel Numeric buttons and buttons Press to input time data or edit points data at the cursor position in menu display Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down the SFT button to input A to F hexadecimal figures for user bits Use the buttons to increase or decrease settings SFT shift button Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down this button to input A to F hexadecimal figures for user bits Use also in combination with other buttons to perform other operations RCL recall button Press to call up a previously entered value CLR clear button Press to clear input data SET button Press to finalize data AUDIO IN OUT button
157. ccessesteceeeeeeees A 39 Items Related to Digital Processing QO1 nescence A 42 Items Related to the Pull Down Control AOI eee eee A 44 Other Items TOL ranr Baie edn etd ide ee A 46 ndeko nnee cechetvacceseSestiacbestbdesecstesevbadscessadsSecdesadones sousctese I 1 Table of Functions Factory Default Settings scsssceee Last page 4 Table of Contents 1 1 1 Features of the HDW F500 The HDW F500 is a HD digital videocassette recorder using the HDCAM format Comparable to a conventional digital Betacam in size weight and ease of use the HDW F500 is a small lightweight HD digital VTR using integrated circuit technology HDCAM Format The HDCAM format was developed from the digital Betacam format and retains the same ease of use of digital Betacam while yielding high performance HD digital recording and playback The HDCAM format uses the following technologies e Pre filtering and a new coefficient recording system compressing the data by a factor of seven e Powerful error correcting codes e High performance high accuracy heads and drum with dynamic tracking DT together with a new auto tracking technique yielding highly reliable narrow track recording and playback Together these technologies allow 120 minutes of recording on a large size 2 inch HDCAM cassette the same size as a conventional digital Betacam cassette Digital Signal Processing In an HDCAM VTR the
158. ccurs even when the minimum setting 5 ms is selected When cut edit is selected in item 317 to prevent this from happening a discontinuity in the audio signal occurs There is however no effect on the recording of the video signal a The cross fade time is 24 ms b The actual fade time is 49 ms c The actual fade time is 114 ms A 39 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Item number Item Settable range Function 812 AUDIO CH3 4 INPUT SOURCE ARRANGE CH3 CH4 sw sw CH3 CH4 ch1 sw CH3 CH4 sw ch2 CH3 CH4 ch1 ch2 Select the input signal for digital audio channels 3 and 4 CH3 CH4 sw sw The signal thatis selected by the upper control panelis inputto channels 3 and 4 CH3 CH4 ch1 sw The signal to be recorded in channel 1 is also recorded inchannel3 CH3 CH4 sw ch2 The signal to be recorded in channel 2 is also recordedin channel 4 CH3 CH4 ch1 ch2 The signal to be recorded in channel 1 is recorded in channel 3 while the signal to be recorded in channel 2 is recorded in channel 4 The edit preset for channels 3 and 4 is completely independent Even if this item is set to CH3 CH4 sw sw and insert editing is performed with edit preset for channel 1 only no signalis recorded in channel 3 The recording level is determined not by the settings for channels 3 and 4 but by the level control of the input channels used as the source when this setting is CH3 CH4
159. ck speeds of 1 to 2 times normal speed and is muted for playback speeds of more than 1 or 2 times normal speed Variable mode playback Follow the procedure below to play back in variable mode oOooooo a 000 O10 99 8 oO Oo 0O m o o OO o oO ONO 3 2 3 Variable mode playback 1 Press the VAR button so that it lights up The indicator lights up and the VTR enters still VAR mode 2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback direction and set the angle of rotation as required to achieve the desired playback speed Variable mode Q The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds to the angle of the search dial A direction indicator lt br gt lights up to indicate the direction of playback The search dial clicks at the positions for still picture and normal speed playback 3 Set the search dial to center position for still picture or press the STOP button to stop variable mode playback To return to normal speed playback Press the PLAY button To alternate between normal speed playback and variable mode playback After you have set the search dial to the angle that corresponds to the desired playback speed pressing the PLAY button or VAR button selects normal speed playback or variable mode playback respectively To stop or start variable mode playback press the STOP button or VAR button
160. connector The INPUT CHECK button works for all of the HD SD converter outputconneciors 777 V FILTER SELECT 1 Selects coefficient of the vertical interpolation filter forthe 2 HD SD converter output The higher the figureis the 3 higher the vertical resolutionis 778 LETTER BOX MODE 16 9 When item 754 is setto LETTER BOX this setting 14 9 specifies the aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output 13 9 16 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter outputis 16 9 14 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter outputis 14 9 13 9 The aspect ratio of the HD SD converter outputis 13 9 A 38 Appendix Items Related to the Audio Control 801 The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings Item number ltem Seitable range Function ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 cue 801 AUDIO INPUT analg Selects the type and channels of the audio input signals select SDI analg Audio signals input to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT ALL CHANNELS AES EBU connectors SDTI SDI Audio signals inputto the HD SDI INPUT connectors 802 AUDIO INPUT analg AES EBU Audio signals input to the AUDIO INPUT AES select SI EBU connectors l CH 1 AES EBU SDTI Only when the optional HKDV SO6A SDTIBoardis installed If SDTI is selected in item 701 the SDT SDT audio signal input to the SDTI OPTION INconnectoris 803 AUDIO INPUT analg automatically selecte
161. control panel during editing when this VTR is used as a recorder and an external VTR is connected to the REMOTE1 IN P OUT 9P connectors as a player PLAYER The tape transport buttons and editing operation buttons on the control panel control the external player VTR RECORDER The tape transport buttons and editing operation buttons on the control panel control the recorder VTR this VTR The PLAYER RECORDER buttons have no effect when using this VTR alone PREREAD indicator Lights up during preread mode Formore information about PREREAD see 6 2 3 Performing Preread Editing on page 6 18 2 1 4 Lower Control Panel Tape Transport Operations Section STANDBY button EJECT button PREROLL button PREVIEW REVIEW button amp PSERVO indicator PLAY button REC EDIT button REC INHIBIT indicator Lower control panel tape transport operations section STANDBY button EJECT button Press this button in other than standby mode to make Press to eject the cassette When the button is pressed it light up and place the VTR in standby mode The the tape is automatically unthreaded and the cassette is head drum rotates in standby mode thereby ejected in a few seconds Resets the display when CTL shortening the time required for the tape to start codes appear in the menu display
162. d and AUDIO INPUT MONITOR select SDI SELECT buttons on the upper control panel become CH 2 AES EBU unlitand another inputselection cannotbe made SDTI 804 AUDIO INPUT analg select SDI CH 3 AES EBU SDTI 805 AUDIO INPUT analg select SDI CH 4 AES EBU SDTI 806 AUDIO EMPHASIS off Selects the emphasis mode when recording digital audio on signals converted from analog input audio signals off Emphasis is not applied to any of the audio signals on Emphasis is applied to all of the audio signals 807 AUDIO MONITOR ch1 Selects the audio channel output from the AUDIO Lselect ch2 MONITOR OUTPUT Lconnector 808 AUDIO MONITOR ch1 Rselect ch2 ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 cue Selects the audio channel output from the AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT R connector 809 DIGITALJOG off Switches digital jog sound on and off SOUND on off Digital jog sound is switched off In this case the sound for channels for which speed correction processing is notbeing carried outis output eveninthe case of STILL on Digitaljog sound is switched on 811 DIGITAL AUDIO 5ms Specifies the fade processing time during cross fading or FADE TIME 10 ms fading in out of digital audio signals 15ms 20ms Note 25ms Processing for cross fading fading in and fading outstarts 50 ms after an IN or OUT point This item specifies rewriting 85ms during recording following the OUT point Rewriting of one 1415ms field o
163. dio signals are output EE MU Theinputvideo signalis output The audio output is muted REC PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during recording EE EE PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output EE EE Theinput video and audio signals are output EDIT PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during editing EE EE PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output EE EE Theinput video and audio signals are output SHUTTLE PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals during shuttle EE EE playback PB PB PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio outputis muted EE EE Theinput video and audio signals are output PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output JOG PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during jog PB MU playback PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output PB MU The playback video signalis output The audio outputis muted VAR PB PB Selects the video and audio output signals during variable PB MU playback PB PB The playback video and audio signals are output PB MU The playback video signalis output The audio outputis muted 018 AUTO EJECT off Selects the condition under which the cassette is LEVEL LEVEL1 automatically ejected after being played back for afew LEVEL2 seconds LEVEL3 When the cassette is ejected in accordance with this setting the warning message 17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE appears in the display off
164. do the deletion of a time code or line Press the ALT UNDO ALL buttons A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of the undo operation Press the UNDO ALL button while pressing down the SFT button To cancel the undo operation press the CLR button Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 45 ia i Ga nN suas nuay p saldeyo NMI 4 4 CUE Menu To copy time data of a cue point to another cue point specified in the CUE menu 1 Press the ALT COPY to CUE buttons A message appears in the control panel display requesting confirmation of the copy operation To cancel the copy operation Press the CLR button 2 Press the COPY to CUE button while pressing down the SFT button The time data of the cue point is copied to the cue point indicated in the CUE menu Changing Mrk data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line with the mark attribute to be changed and then press the MARK button Or move the cursor directly to the mark attribute to be changed and then press the CHANGE DATA button In both cases each press of the button changes the attribute as follows OK NG gt KP keep temporarily blank no attribute Changing the recording starting point setting Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the recording starting point section Then press the CHANGE DATA button Each press of the button turns the setting on the indication appears or off the
165. e Based upon RS 170A CCIR R 624 3 Digital audio system Digital audio signal format CH 1 to CH 4 Sampling frequency 48 kHz synchronized with video Quantization 20 bits sample Wow and flutter Below measurable level Headroom Selectable settings 20 18 16 15 14 12 and 9 dB Emphasis T1 50 us T2 15 us on off selectable in recording mode Analog output A D quantization 20 bits sample D A quantization 20 bits sample Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 dB 1 0 dB 0 dB at 1 kHz More than 95 dB at 1 kHz emphasis on Dynamic range Distortion Less than 0 05 at 1 kHz emphasis on reference level Crosstalk Less than 90 dB at 1 kHz between any two channels Analog audio Cue track Frequency response 90 Hz to 12 kHz 3 dB S N ratio More than 45 dB at 3 distortion level Distortion Less than 2 T H D at 1 kHz reference level Wow and flutter Less than 0 2 rms 1 Reference level 4 dBm The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1 2 3 4 CUE connectors ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 2 3 4 CUE connectors and TIME CODE IN OUT connectors XLR 3 pin have Input connectors HD SDI INPUT BNC 1 1 INPUT MONITOR HD SDI 1 485 Gbps conforms to SMPTE 292M BTA S 004B SDTI OPTION IN when the optional HKDV 506A is installed BNC 1 SDTI 270Mbps REF IN BNC 2 2 loop through HD Trilevel SYNC 0 6 V p p 75 Q sync negative SD Black burst 0 286 V p p 75 Q sync negative AUDIO INPUT
166. e signal to be used as the reference signal for VTR operations ext The servoreference signal is forced tobe EXT ipt Thesignal fromthe HD SDIINPUT orSDTI OPTION IN is used as the reference signal for VTR operations The VIDEO IN button switches the video input signal auto Duringrecordingoreditpreset the signal from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI OPTION IN is used as a reference signal In all other cases the servo operates using the signal setting of item 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select in the VTR SETUP menu If the signal selected in 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select is not present the servo operates using an internal reference 4 56 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 5 3 Adjusting the Output Video Signal MASTER LEVEL to FINE Adjusting the output video signal Follow the procedure below to adjust the output video signal 10 Oho ogo O QO OOO O ON Diol BFA Adjusting the output video signal 1 Press the function button F4 to F10 whose setting you wish to set The setting display section lights up 2 Change the numerical value by pressing the IAI or V button or or button To change the value quickly press the buttons while holding down the SFT button To set the preset value Press the center cursor button prst appears over the respective function button 3 Press the function button F4 to F10 after adjusting
167. e can be controlled with the PHONES volume knob For details see Section 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals on page 5 2 VIDEO CONTROL Digital Video Processor Control connector D sub 9 pin Connects to the optional HKDV 503 HD Digital Video Controller to enable remote control of the internal digital video processor Turn off the power before connecting the remote controller RS 232C connector RS 232C serial interface D sub 25 pin Receives or transmits RS 232C serial remote control signals and or VTR status data from to external equipment When this connector is being used for communication the RS 232C indicator on the upper control panel will be lit PARALLEL I O 50P connector D sub 50 pin with optional BKDW 509 Inputs an external remote control signal For details refer to the Maintenance Manual D CONV SDI D1 D2 SDI video audio OPTION OUT connectors BNC Outputs up to three sets of video audio signals When the ALT CHARA SUPER key of the TC menu is set to ON text data such as time codes are superimposed on the output of connector 3 SUPER Selection of D1 D2 output is made using the OTHERS CHECK SYSTEM D CONV SDI button in the MAINTENANCE menu This connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board is installed PULL DOWN OUT OPTION connectors BNC Outputs two sets of 2 3 pull down video audio signals When the ALT PD CHARA key
168. e frame frequency is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz the duration must be alternated between 2 and 3 fields when recording films This setting is automatically activated in film mode When editing finishes the next IN and OUT points are automatically set This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz CG Primarily for recording computer graphics this setting allows editing by individual frames When the edit is completed the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point The next OUT point is automatically set one frame ahead of the IN point normal Use this setting for normal insert editing 302 PREROLL TIME 0 sec 5 sec 30 sec This sets the preroll time The range is from 0 to 30 seconds in steps of 1 second The preroll time should generally be set to at least 3 seconds and for phase adjustment with an editing controller it is recommended to set the preroll time to at least 5 seconds 303 POSTROLL TIME 0 sec 2 sec 30 sec This sets the postroll time for which the tape transport keeps moving after reaching an OUT point The range is from 0 to 30 seconds in steps of 1 second 304 VAR SPEED RANGE FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 1 to 2 1 15 to 2 45 Specifies the variable tape speed range when the variable speed playback is executed by a remote control unit connected to the REMOTE1 IN 9P connector 1 to 2 1 to 2 t
169. e sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is compressed changing the aspect ratio to 13 9 VF e Squeeze mode SQUEEZE HD The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is Horizontal adjustment of the edge cropping Adjust the 766 H CROP POSITION setting in VTR SETUP menu e Letter box mode LETTER BOX When the letter box mode is selected you can select one of the following conversion methods through item 778 LETTER BOX MODE in the VTR SETUP menu When 16 9 is selected compressed changing the aspect ratio to 13 9 e7 The signal is compressed maintaining an aspect ratio of 16 9 When 14 9 is selected HD The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is compressed changing the aspect ratio to 14 9 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 7 yoeq ejq Duipoooy G seldeu9 yoeghe q Bulpio99y G Jajdeyo 5 3 Preparing for Playback 5 3 4 Selecting the Conversion Mode of the Effective Scanning Line Number when HKDV 502 is installed When the optional HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Board is installed in the HDW F500 to select the conversion mode follow the procedure below 1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of a small pointed object ROM CH COND VER MAINTE INFO TCR 00 00 00 00 MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY ERR LOG v OPERATION 529H0URS DRUM RUNNIN
170. e thick line 24F Presets the 24 frames time code The A frame of the pull down sequence is preset 30F Presets the 30 frames time code The A frame of the pull down sequence is preset When 30F is selected in the step 3 Press the PDTC DF NDF key to select DF or NDF This selection is effective only for 30F time code DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode auto The unit switches the running mode DF NDF automatically according to the frame frequency of the unit When the frame frequency is 23 976 Hz the unit switches to the drop frame mode and switches to the non drop frame mode when it is 24 Hz When 24F is selected in the step 3 Skip this step Enter the time code data in the data entry window with numeric keys 1 Press the TC button then press the ALT button The ALT TC menu appears 4 26 Chapter 4 Menu Settings PRESET REMAIN T CH COND PDPSET MODE L 113min TREENI moram Pata entry Cza TCR 00 00 00 00 window PDTIME 4E IE SET 00 00 00 00 H M S F 30F TC O04 OOm OOs OOF PDTC DF NDF EXIT Cor CJ 6 Press the SET button to set the input data SET is displayed PRESET REMAIN T CH COND MODE L _113min PDPSET 01 00 30 00 La RER TCR 00 00 00 00 PDTIME Ca O04 00m OOs OOF 30F TC O04 00m OOs OOF PDTC DF NDF EXIT CL
171. e will be displayed even when multiple errors occur but the error log menu keeps a history of the errors For more information about error messages refer to the Maintenance Manual After the error occurs eliminate the cause of the error and turn the unit back on If the error message appears again when the unit is turned on contact your Sony Protection Mode To protect the tape and the mechanical parts of the VTR the servo control system automatically stops tape transport and the drum motor and enters protection mode when an error occurs Cassettes may not be inserted or ejected during protection mode When a cassette is stuck in the unit because of protection mode make sure to disconnect the power before removing the cassette manually representative For information about removing cassettes manually refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual For more information about eliminating errors refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual DOLBY NR CH COND DIGITAL HOME PB EE KEY INH GREEN BASEBALL EDIT SET TC A ERROR 01 RECINH REEL TROUBLE 1 F off ASSEM i coD BLE i Lett INS e Error message 4 E3 off INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off i Al A REEL TROUBLE 1 Slack in the tape was detected during threading or unthreading R
172. ecording lt gt i4 Player VTR Playback mode Stop Tape movement during automatic editing a Preroll time Factory set to 5 seconds Can be set from 0 to 30 seconds in 1 second steps through the SET UP menu b The post roll time can be set between 0 and 30 seconds in units of seconds using the SET UP menu c Over recording time 2 seconds 6 12 Chapter 6 Editing Monitoring signals during editing During editing you can monitor the following video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the recorder VTR e Between preroll and IN points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored e Between IN and OUT points Playback signal of the player VTR can be monitored in E E mode e Between OUT and post roll points Playback signal of the recorder VTR can be monitored The video and audio signals that can be monitored are shown in the diagram below IN point OUT point Vv v PB EE PB recorder VTR player VTR recorder VTR Monitoring signals during editing In CONFI mode you can monitor video and audio signals that are just being edited Through a menu setting you can also monitor signals between preroll and postroll points including portions between IN and OUT points through the CONFI confidence heads during editing The CONFI setting is made in item 017 PB EE SELECT MENU in the VTR SETUP menu To perform automatic editing To carry out autom
173. editing Video and audio signals that have been pre read can be externally processed and simultaneously re recorded A variety of audio editing modes You can select cut in editing cross fade editing and fade in out editing for the audio signals 1 LTC Longitudinal Time Code Time code recorded on a longitudinal track VITC Vertical Interval Time Code Time code recorded on a video track during the vertical blanking interval 1 4 Chapter 1 Overview Display of duration between edit points The duration between any two of IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points can be displayed by simultaneously pressing two buttons corresponding to those edit points Digital time counter The time counter display shows CTL and time codes LTC VITC or user bits data for precise setting of edit points 1 2 Optional Accessories The following accessories can be used with the HDW F500 BKDW 509 Parallel 50 pin Interface Kit A 50 pin parallel interfaces makes the HDW F500 compatible with different broadcast station systems HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board Allows you to output an NTSC PAL component or composite signal HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Board e Allows you to convert an effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 or from 1080 to 1035 Note This function is operative only when the frame frequency of the VTR is set to 29 97Hz or 30Hz e Allows you to smooth the picture motion and improve the vertical resolution d
174. eed by 15 to ensure synchronization between for example two VTRs playing back the same program Independent level controls The recording and playback levels of each of the four audio channels can be adjusted independently while peak values on all four audio channels are monitored Tele File memory label system The HDW F500 incorporates the Tele File memory label system to allow users to write and update videocassette management information and cue point data on optional MLB 1B 100 memory labels providing greater efficiency in cassette management and editing Features for Ease of Operation Compact lightweight low power consumption The VTR is small and light enough to be used in outside broadcast vans or in EFP Electronic Field Production assignments Remote control operation The VTR has a serial RS 422A 9 pin connector to allow control of the VTR by an external control unit through RS 422A communications The VTR also comes with 9 pin REMOTE1 IN 9P and OUT 9P connectors to support bridge connection of multiple HDW F500 units or other VTRs equipped with 9 pin remote connectors for simultaneous operation Furthermore by using the optional BKDW 509 Parallel 50 pin Interface Kit you can control the VTR from an external control unit with a parallel interface Digital hours meter Three different hour displays and one cycle count display are supported showing total elapsed time since the VTR was turned on total dru
175. egistration is completed and the SET UP menu appears in the display again Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 3 G on n WN sum s nu y p 4ay deup HN 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 4 1 4 VTR Memory Bank Function Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu settings including items registered to the PF1 2 menus with titles The contents of all eight VTR memory banks can be stored on a memory card Current menu settings in the VTR CURRENT SETUP These settings are stored outside the VTR memory banks even when the power Storing recalling is off x Ji VTR memory banks SETUP BANK 1 to 8 and fj SETUP BANK contains the factory set menu settings By calling up SETUP BANK I you can restore all menu items to their factory settings vl i Memory card SETUP Storing recalling BANK 0 to 8 The card stores setting data in same way as the VTR memory banks These contents can be later called up in the VTR Storing recalling VTR memory bank function For details on memory card use refer to 4 1 5 Memory Card Function on page 4 6 For details on adding titles to the contents of the VTR memory bank refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 The contents of SETUP BANK fj cannot be changed 4 4 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory ban
176. el application software The explanations of menu operations in this chapter assume the use of the VTR control panel Opening the TELE FILE menu Do one of the following e Press the TELE FILE button while in the CUE menu e Select on for item 124 Tele File MENU auto popup in the VTR SETUP menu Then with the HOME TC CUE or SETUP menu open insert a cassette bearing an optional MLB 1B 100 memory label into the VTR To change the information displayed in the TELE FILE menu Press the lt or gt button To display log data IN or OUT points in the TELE FILE menu Do one of the following e Press the ENTRY POINT button while in the TELE FILE menu Then select INPUT e Select IN OUT Point for item 126 Tele File ENTRY POINT in the VTR SETUP menu Exiting the TELE FILE menu Press the WRITE EXIT button The entered or modified data is saved to the memory label and the VTR exits the TELE FILE menu If TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited see page 4 39 while the contents of a memory label are being modified only the data modified prior to the prohibition will be saved to the memory label when the F10 WRITE EXIT button is pressed To exit the TELE FILE menu without saving data to a memory label Press the EJECT button Or press the ALT F2 UNDO ALL buttons to display a message in the control panel display requesting confirmation of the undoing operation Then press the F2
177. elect prst with the TCG MODE button in the TC menu and then follow the steps below Note e Set the RUN MODE button to rec before setting the time data for recording When you select rec time data advances from a set value only during recording When you select free time code advances in real time after the initial value has been set e During recording VITC is always written to the AUX data area of the video signal 14 2 IO OO 2 8 9 lt 00 gt Setting time codes 1 Press the TIMER SEL button to select the TC time code to be set 2 Enter the new setting in the data entry window with the numeric buttons For example to enter 01HOOM30SOOF press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s is are set to O when you press the SET button TIMER REMAIN T CH COND TC SEL L 113min GREEN Data entry TE PLAY LOCK window TIMER TCR VITC 2FD F1 CG 01n 04n 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 TIMER 4 3 SET IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 TIMER HOLD TC TCG TCG RUN SEL souRcE mope mope PF NDF VITC vitc int L Prst rec DF TCG To cancel entered values Press the CLR button 3 Press the SET button to set the entered value If you pressed the or button then entered a value the result
178. enceofthe Thedatais The datais IN OUT point datais unchanged changed correct Thetimesequenceofthe Thedatais The datais IN OUT point datais not unchanged unchanged correct TheINpointhasnotbeen Thedatais The datais input unchanged changed Changing Tk data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the take data to be changed Then use the numeric buttons to change the value Note that only 1 digit or 2 digit values can be entered Or move the cursor to the take data and press the CHANGE DATA button or the button repeatedly to increase the value in increments of 1 Press the button repeatedly to decrease the value in increments of 1 Note that the value cannot go below 0 Changing Cut data Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed and then enter the new data using the numeric buttons and buttons Pressing the button enters the tilde Press the numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase letters A to J Note that a maximum of four characters can be entered Or do the procedure below to change the data Jo OO 9 9 0 2 46 1 3 O oO oO oO o O oO oO oO QO Co 1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut data to be changed To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the
179. end point are cleared when you eject the tape after inserting a tape you must record for at least one minute or so on the tape before you can do backspace editing After recording the present end of the recorded position becomes the recording end point When you press the REC EDIT button afterwards the VTR automatically prerolls a few seconds before the recording end point and starts assemble editing If no data for the recording end point exist backspace editing is not performed Cue point data is cleared when a cassette is inserted However cue point data recalled from a memory card before a cassette is inserted is not cleared when a cassette is inserted 4 4 7 TELE FILE Menu Use the TELE FILE menu to read and update cue point information log IN OUT points information and cassette management information on optional MLB 1B 100 memory labels Operations through the TELE FILE menu can be carried out from either the control panel of the VTR or a personal computer connected to the VTR To use the control panel specify control panel for item 123 Tele File CONTROL MODE in the VTR SETUP menu To use a personal computer specify RS 2320 Before you can use the menu to operate the VTR from a personal computer the optional MLZ 100 memory label application software must be installed in the computer For details on the use of a personal computer refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional MLZ 100 memory lab
180. enerator AUDIO INT SG off off Does notdisplay the operating status of the internal on audio testsignal generator on Displays the operating status of the internal audio test signal generator METADATA off Selects whether the reception setting bank name forthe on meta data multiplexed in the HD SDI packetis displayed or not off The bank name is not displayed on The bank name iis displayed 122 MULTI CUE on Selects whether to erase cue point data in multi cue mode CLEAR by inject off when acassette is inserted on Erase cue point data off Do noterase cue point data 123 Tele File control panel Selects the device to be used for TELE FILE menu CONTROL MODE RS 232C operations control panel The control panel of the VTR is used RS 232C A personal computer connected to the RS 232C connector of the VTR is used 124 Tele File MENU off Specifies whether or notthe TELE FILE menu appears auto popup on automatically when a cassette with a memory label is inserted off The TELE FILE menu does not appear on The TELE FILE menu appears 125 Tele FileTHREAD _ not clear Specifies whether or notthe thread counter is resetwhena COUNTER clear when format memory label is formatted mode notclear The thread counter is not reset when format The thread counter is reset A 22 Appendix Items Related to Remote Interface 201 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number ltem Seitable range Function 201 R
181. ents Reference signal connections For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator Reference signal Switcher or signal generator HD SDI INPUT 75Q termination switch ON For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator For recording signals from a HD VTR Reference signal HD SDI INPUT HD SDI OUTPUT HDW F500 Recorder HDW F500 Player 75Q termination switch OFF 75Q termination switch ON For recording signals from a HD VTR 3 6 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR For playback Reference signal HD SDI OUTPUT 1 2 3 MONITOR 75Q termination switch ON HD serial input monitor The following signals can be used as a reference signal e HD trilevel SYNC signal of an appropriate field frequency for the external synchronization e Black burst signal of 525 59 94 Hz e Black burst signal of 625 50 Hz Input the signal of the appropriate field frequency for your system Chapter 3 Set
182. enus to register up to 40 of the most frequently used items from the other menus up to ten items each can be registered to PF1 ALT PF1 PF2 and ALT PF2 Menu items that may be registered can be displayed by pressing the PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN button in the SET UP menu SET UP menu e The VTR BANK menu allows up to eight pages of menu settings to be saved e Use the MEMORY CARD menu to store current settings of the VTR and up to 8 pages of the contents of the VTR memory bank to a memory card e Use the scrollable PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu to display the items that can be registered in the PF1 PF2 menus and to select and register the most frequently used menu items e Use the scrollable VTR SETUP menu to display the items necessary for making initial settings and to directly change settings without registering them with the function buttons for each menu e Use the PANEL SETUP menu to set control panel operations such as the keyboard sound output MAINTENANCE menu Use this menu to access the maintenance functions For details refer to the Maintenance Manual A full complement of storage recall functions These functions allow you to use titles to store and recall menu settings in either the VTR s internal memory banks or memory cards VTR memory banks These memory banks allow you to store up to eight pages of VTR settings in addition to the current VTR settings Factory settings are also stored here allowing the VTR to be r
183. es of time data Time data Drop frame mark of the time code reader Drop frame mark of the time code generator O Field mark of the VITC data SIHJUJTITILIE SiTpijeyy B Control VTR indication Contents of superimposed data Note The example above shows the factory set contents of data By changing the 626 DISPLAY INFORMATION select setting in the VTR SETUP menu different types of information can also be displayed on the second line 4 30 Chapter 4 Menu Settings When time data or user bits are not read correctly a will be displayed in this block so that the symbols become T R U R etc Time code reader drop frame marks e drop frame mode non drop frame mode Time code generator drop frame marks e drop frame mode non drop frame mode VITC data field marks gt blank space fields 1 and 3 x fields 2 and 4 Operation mode The contents are divided into blocks A and B as shown below A block indicates the operation mode B block indicates the tape speed or servo lock status Operation modes Display Operation mode A block B block TAPE UNTHREAD Cassette not inserted STANDBY OFF Standby off mode T RELEASE Tension release mode STOP Stop mode PREROLL Preroll mode PLAY Playback mode servo unlocked
184. eset to these values at any time Memory cards Each memory card can hold the current VTR settings as well as up to eight pages of settings A single memory card thus allows you to store and recall the entire contents of the VTR memory banks Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 E oe MAIMBAQ Ja deug HAI 1 1 Features Title function This function allows you to add titles when storing data to the VTR memory bank or memory card thus facilitating data retrieval and management Write protect function Setting pages stored in VTR memory banks or memory cards can be write protected on an individual basis A full range of editing functions Two HDW F500 units can be connected allowing automatic or manual assembly and insertion The VTR also features a full range of editing functions including preview review preroll and the setting or changing of edit points Quick access to edit points The following methods are provided for the setting of edit points e Multi cuing for up to 100 edit points e Search dial with shuttle and jog functions e Direct input through numeric buttons DMC Dynamic Motion Control editing Using the DT Dynamic Tracking heads you can play back a section of an edit at speeds between 1 and 2 times normal speed and store the speed variation in memory for later use in automatic editing Split editing In insert mode audio and video edit points can be set separately Preread
185. esigned to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with both the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European standards e EN60065 Product Safety e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission e EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment E4 Controlled EMC environment ex TV studio AVERTISSEMENT Afin d viter tout risque d incendie o
186. ess the PREV PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button 3 Press the A or M button to move the cursor P to the cue number To select the cue number directly by the numeric buttons Enter the cue number in the data entry window with the numeric buttons then press the CUENUM SET button 4 Press the PREROLL button Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 39 ae 3 or WN sbulyjas nuey p saldeyo NMI 4 4 CUE Menu 4 4 5 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point Follow the procedures below to change a selected cue point into an edit point To change an edit point into an IN point Press the SET button while hoding down the IN button To change an edit point into an OUT point Press the SET button while holding down the OUT button To change an edit point into an AUDIO IN point Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO IN button To change an edit point into an AUDIO OUT point Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO OUT button AUDIO IN button AUDIO OUT button a fo OO 2 8 9 IN button SET button OUT button 4 40 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 4 6 Backspace Editing You can perform backspace editing with the CUE menu In backspace editing assemble editing is performed from the recording end point Since the data specifying recording
187. etting SDI SDTI when HKDV 506A is installed F1 TIMER SELECT button in the TC menu TC or CTL Player VTR POWER switch ON REMOTE buttons 1 9P button lights up PB level controls playback levels TIMER SEL button in the TC menu CTL or TC aa F Setting switches and menus 6 2 Chapter6 Editing 6 1 3 Selecting the Edit Mode Select assemble or insert mode F3 ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu fo O10 9 9 9 a O Q ooo O OUI a D Y Derm ABLES F4 INS TC to F10 INS CUE buttons in the HOME menu Selecting the edit mode Press one of the following buttons to select the respective edit mode e Assemble mode ASSEMBLE button in the HOME menu e Insert mode the appropriate INSERT button in the HOME menu F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS A CH1 INS A CH2 INS A CH3 INS A CH4 INS CUE 6 1 4 Setting Edit Points This section describes how to set edit points IN and OUT points In insert mode a technque called split editing allows you to set edit points separately for video and audio Positioning and setting edit points
188. evel controls 2 3 PF1 menu 4 55 PF2 menu 4 59 PHONES jack 2 2 PHONES level control 2 3 PLAY button 2 10 Playback 5 11 capstan override playback 5 14 DMC playback 5 14 jog mode playback 5 12 non audio data 5 16 normal speed playback 5 11 shuttle mode playback 5 12 variable mode playback 5 13 PLAYER RECORDER buttons 2 8 POWER switch 2 2 Preparing for playback 5 6 adjusting the audio playback level 5 6 improving the vertical resolution 5 9 selecting the HD SD conversion mode 5 7 Selecting the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 5 8 setting switches and menus 5 6 Preparing for recording 5 1 adjusting the audio recording level 5 3 monitoring simultaneous playback of recording analog audio 5 4 selecting audio signals 5 2 setting switches and menus 5 1 PREREAD indicator 2 8 Preread editing 4 17 PREROLL button 2 10 Preroll time setting 4 18 PREVIEW REVIEW button 2 10 Pull down output 5 16 Pull down time code Displaying 4 29 Presetting 4 26 R REC EDIT button 2 10 REC INHIBIT indicator 2 10 REC level controls 2 3 Recording 5 5 inhibit mode 4 16 REF SYNC indicators 2 4 Reference signals connections 3 6 Reference signals for video output and servo system 3 5 REF IN SD connectors BNC and 75 Q termination switch 2 15 REF IN HD connectors BNC and 75 Q termination switch 2 15 REF OUT 1125 SYNC connectors 2 15 REMOTE buttons 2 4 REMOTEI IN OUT connectors 2 16 RS 232C connector 2 16 RS 232C indicator 2 4 S
189. ff Applies effect edit mode for editing special effects or for MODE on dubbing atape with an attenuated signal to noise ratio off For normal editing or dubbing on For repeated editing of special effects or for dubbing a tape with a highly attenuated signal to noise ratio 730 ACTIVE LINE 1035 1080 gt 1035 CONV When the HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Boardis installed CONVERT MODE 4980 gt 1035 CROP selects the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 1080 gt 1035 CONV Convertthe effective scanning line number from 1080 to 1035 preserving the aspect ratio of the image 1080 gt 1035 CROP Convertthe effective scanning line number from1080 to 1035 The four sides of the image are cropped then itis horizontally expanded 731 ACTIVE LINE 1080 1035 gt 1080 CONv When the HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Boardis installed CONVERT MODE 4935 gt 1 080 PANEL selects the conversion mode of the effective scanning line number 1035 gt 1080 CONV Convertthe effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 preserving the aspect ratio of the image 1035 gt 1080 PANEL Convertthe effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 The 1035 lines of the image are inserted into the 1035 lines of 1080 lines then itis horizontally compressed 732 SLOW PROCESS on When the HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Boardis installed MODE off selects whether or notto activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow
190. generator is reset and the time data display becomes OOHOOMOOSOOF TC or 00 00 00 00 UBIT Edit points are not affected e Time data read by the time code reader cannot be reset e Time data cannot be reset when the internal time code generator is locked to external time codes or to time codes read by the time code reader Setting the user bit value Select UBIT by pressing the TIMER SEL button 2 Enter the desired user bit value in hexadecimal notation using the numeric buttons Press the 0 to 5 buttons while holding down the SFT button to enter the letters A to F 3 Press the TIMER SET button 4 24 Chapter 4 Menu Settings Recording the current time 1 Select DF by pressing the DF NDF button Select free by pressing the RUN MODE button 2 3 Enter the target time with the numeric buttons while verifying the data in the data entry window 4 When the target time arrives press the TIMER SET button The time code generator starts operating from the specified time To pause the current time Press the TIMER HOLD button The time is paused only while the button is held down 4 3 2 Setting the Time Code Reader TCR SEL Press the TCR SEL button to select the time code to be read by the time code reader during playback VITC Reads VITC auto Reads VITC when the playback speed is 1 2 times normal speed or less and LTC when it is greater than 2 times normal speed LTC
191. gnal is delayed so that the audio signal and the video signal are equal in phase as considering the video signal delay due to video signal processing The pulled down and down converted SDI output signal is also multiplexed with the delayed audio signal Note The AES EBU or analog audio output signal and 24 frame video output signal the main output line of this unit are equal in phase 5 17 Chapter 5 Recording Playback yoeghe q Buipsooey G Jajdeup 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 6 1 1 Overview of Automatic Editing Automatic edit modes The VTR provides the following two modes for automatic editing Assemble mode New scenes are added to the end of previously recorded scenes CTL signals time codes video and audio signals on tape in the player are recorded onto tape in the recorder VTR e Insert mode New scenes are inserted into the middle of previously recorded scenes CTL signals on tape in the recorder VTR are not overwritten Video digital audio cue audio and time code signals can be recorded separately Both of these two edit modes support DMC editing In insert mode you can also use split editing Interpolation of time codes by the CTL counter To use time codes as addresses of edit points the time codes must be recorded on the tape in ascending order As long as they are in ascending order time codes do not have to be continuous The CTL counter automatically interpolates data for
192. hange a character Press the Al button to move the cursor to the scene data to be changed Then press the K or l button to move the insertion position Press the F10 SAVE EXIT button The screen that was on before the scene data was entered is displayed again To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 2 Press the F3 COMMNT EDIT button To copy Scn data Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is to be pasted Then press the RCL button The scene data from the line above is copied to the selected line COMMENT EDIT GBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUUWXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 5 7 SH4R _ HDID2CAM Changing Comment data To display comment data press the gt button several times BACK SET SAVE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT LAC JC L_ CUE CH COND TELE FILE SCAN TCR 00 00 00 00 ENTRY REC DATEL1998 02 101 Rest 50 POINT TITLELNAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL commNT 3 EDIT 3 Pretty Good 4 for NG Awards 5 Goal CHANGE 6 Celebration DATA 7 AGAR
193. hannels 1 and 2 NO A3 A4 INPUT No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 3 and 4 INVALID SDI DATA SDI input signal data is invalid NO CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MODE The cassette compartment does not operate during no cassette compartment mode NO LTC REPRODUCED LTC signal not detected on the tape DT UNLOCKED DT cannot be correctly traced during playback recording or editing PROCESSOR IS IN TEST MODE The processor is in test mode VIDEO PLL UNLOCKED Video lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal 1 0 Appendix Error Log Menu The time and time codes of errors and warnings Openig the error log menu occurring during operation can be displayed in a list Use the tip of a narrow object to press the form in the display Maximum listing is 99 items MAINTENANCE switch and press the ERR LOG button PAGE PEER DIAGNOSTICS TOP m7 ERROR LOG EEE O aB END TOTAL 03 v 1 00 00 00 00 E A3 FULL SYS NOU RAM CHECK SUM ERR MSG 2 23 59 59 09 C OB VIDEO DATA ERROR 3 23 59 59 09 C OF ALL AUDIO DATA ERROR CLEAR L_ x WARNI CONDI Ng ERROR FION TIME EXIT Error Log Menu Button Display Function Setting Fi PAGE TOP Move to the top page on off F2 PAGE END Move to the last page on off F3 FULL MSG Disp
194. he IN OUT section to be entered To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 3 Press the IN button to enter IN point data or OUT button to enter OUT point data while pressing down the ENTRY button The movement of the cursor is automatic as described in the table below and time code is entered continuously Input condition When the IN button is When the OUT pressed while button is pressed pressing the ENTRY while pressing the button ENTRY button Only INpoint INpointdatais OUT point datais datahas modified andthe entered andthe beenentered jcursorstaysontheIN cursormovestothe pointdata next IN point Only OUT IN point data is OUT point datais pointdatahas jenteredandthe modified andthe beenentered cursormovestothe cursor stays onthe next IN point OUT point Both IN OUT _ INpointdatais OUT point datais pointdata entered or modified entered or modified have not andthe cursor stays andthe cursor stays beenentered onthe IN pointdata on the OUT point or have been data entered To display the duration between an IN point and an OUT point Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN OUT section and press the
195. he ALARM BEEP button repeatedly high The alarm sound is loud low The alarm sound is weak off The alarm sound is off Setting the elapsed time until screen saver activated time Press the SCREEN SAVER button repeatedly 3min The screen saver goes on 3 minutes after the last button operation 10min The screen saver goes on 10 minutes after the last button operation 60min The screen saver goes on 60 minutes after the last button operation off The screen saver function is off 4 66 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 5 1 Preparing for Recording 5 1 1 Setting Switches and Menus Before recording set the switches and menus as shown For details refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses in the diagram below POWER switch ON REC level controls Reference level or appropriate recording level page 5 3 AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons Audio channels to be recorded page 5 2 Indicators Check the REFERENCE signal REMOTE buttons None of these buttons light up Si i Q DIGITALVIDEO CASSETTE RECORDE Menu settings ALT F2 REC INH buttons in the HOME menu off FA F6 F7 TIMER SEL button in the TC menu Select the time data to be displayed TCG SOURCE b
196. he audio level meters for 4 dBm input Recording with the specific recording level Pull out the REC level controls for the appropriate channels and rotate them so that the audio level meters indicate approximately 0 dB for the average audio signal input level REC level controls Adjusting the recording level Selecting the display range of the audio level meters You can switch the range of audio level meters display by pressing the DISPLAY FULL FINE button on the upper control panel SONY mH OO0Oo0oo0o000 o goad ola 20000 acme ool ofa DISPLAY FULL FINE button Selecting the display range of the audio level meters Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 3 yoeghe q Buipsiooey S saydeup yoeghe q Bulpso99y G Jeldeyp 5 1 Preparing for Recording FULL mode The meter range is 60 to 0 dB or 40 to 20 dB FINE mode The meter scale is enlarged and the signal level is indicated in 0 25 dB steps with the reference marker indicated by a lit LED in the middle of each meter The display range of the audio level meters in FULL mode can be set with 814 LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR SETUP menu 5 1 4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio Signals Being Recorded Monitoring signals being recorded Using the 017
197. he video output and servo system are selected 3 2 1 Reference Signals for Output Video Depending on the operating condition VTR SETUP menu setting and the input signal the video output signal from the VTR can be synchronized as follows Ze Is the VTR currently recording or is EDIT PRESENT on What is the 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select setting in the VTR SETUP menu extrn SD extrn HD Ts there an inpu Signal on the connector selected by the 701 VIDEO INPUT select setting in the VTR SETUP s there a signal of the correct frequency on the REF IN HD connector S there a signal of the correct frequency on the REF IN SD connector Yes y Synchronization with the video Y Synchronization with the video Synchronization with the reference video signal input signal input to the signal input to the REF IN HD REF IN SD designated by the connector connector 701 VIDEO INPUT select setting No external synchronization synchronization is internal Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 5 YLA y dn Bum s g 4deyo Hh HLA 94 dn Bunjes Jajdeyo WA 3 2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System CE E UMM E U E U E U 3 2 2 Reference Signals Connections Make the reference signal connections as follows according to your recording or playback requirem
198. he ECC added is recorded in the form of serial data The HDCAM format adopts a scrambled NRZI channel coding system for off track and noise characteristics Playback signal processing The playback digital data is equalized by equalizer circuits and error corrected by powerful inner and outer ECC which can correct most data disturbed by noise and dropouts in the reproduced signal Data that cannot be completely corrected in this way is passed through a bit reduction decoder and corrected by an error concealment circuit Output interface Component video data are converted into serial data and multiplexed with audio data and time code then output in the HD SDI format By installing an HD SD Converter Board HKDV 501A optional accessory D1 SDI or D2 SDI and analog composite outputs are also available Audio output can be data from the AES EBU digital interface or analog audio converted from digital signals Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 P iY O p D ol e lt D Lo s D MAIMOAQ Jadeyo WA 1 1 Features Advanced Recording and Playback Functions High quality digital recording The HDCAM system uses a component system to record video signals An AES EBU format with a wide dynamic range is used for 4 channel audio recording A unique and powerful error correction circuit and concealment circuit are used in digital signal processing Accurate stable video signal output is made possible by setting and
199. hing STOP button 104 REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING off on Specifies whether the REC INHIBIT indicator lights or flashes when REC inhibit plug on the back side of the inserted cassette tape is pressed down off The REC INHIBIT indicator lights up on The REC INHIBIT indicator flashes 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE type1 1 to 1 type2 2 to 2 type3 2 to 2 Selects the tape speed VTR command characteristics for search JOG dial rotation TYPE1 Tape speed changes linearly ina range of 1 to 1 times normal tape speed TYPE2 Tape speed changes in a range of 2 to 2 times normal tape speed as shown below in TYPE 2 Tape speed does not change when the search dialis withina range of 1 times normal tape speed TYPES Tape speed changes linearly ina range of 2 to 2 times normal tape speed as shown below in TYPE 3 TYPE2 TYPE3 speed speed FWD FWD 42 jAi 2 FWD rotation FWD RVS rotation AEE 2 E E 109 KEY INHIBIT off When this is setto on the KEY INHIBIT indicator in the upper control panel lights and some all or a group of the following buttons are disabled REMOTE button onthe upper control panel AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT button editing operation buttons onthe lower control panel For details of the keys and buttons disabled by this setting see item 110 A 20 Appendix
200. ields If color frames occurs intermittently during playback the capstan servo stays locked to that colorframe Note e This setting is only active when the frame frequency ofthe unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz e Tolockcomposite signal outputto four fields on this VTR set item 005 to external and 006 to extern SD A 16 Appendix Item number 005 Item SERVO AV REFERENCE select Settable range input auto external Function The servo reference is determined by the following menu input The reference signalis obtained from the HD SDI INPUT connectors or SDTI OPTION IN connector auto During recording andin the edit preset state the reference signal is obtained from the HD SDIINPUT connectors or SDTI OPTION IN connector When item 001 is notsetto off the reference singnal is always external Inallother cases the servo operates using the signal selected in item 006 as the reference signal Ifthe signal selected in item 006 is not present the servo operates using an internal reference signal external The servo reference signal is always external 006 EXTERNAL REFERENCE select extrn HD extrn SD Whenitem 005 is setto external this selects the signal used as reference by this unit extrn HD The signal input to the REF IN HD connector is usedas the reference signal for playback and audio signalrecording extrn SD The signal input to the REF IN SD connecto
201. ightestlevel 7 isthe darkest level 819 NON AUDIO MODE select BURST DATA MODE CONTINUOUS DATA MODE Specifies the formatin which non audio data is recorded BURST DATA MODE Selectthis setting for recording data compressed in units of video frames e g Dolby E CONTINUOUS DATA MODE Selectthis setting for recording data compressed without any relationship to the video frames e g Dolby Digital AC 3 A 40 Appendix Item number Item Settable range Function 820 NON AUDIO Channelselect off SDI CH12 MODE1 SDI CH34 MODE2 SDI all MODE3 AES CH12 MODE4 AES CH34 MODES AES all MODE6 SDI CH12 AES CH34 MODE7 SDI CH34 AES CH12 MODE8 Selects the audio signal and the channels to be recorded as non audio data off Non audio signals are not recorded SDICH12 MODE1 Channels 1 and 2 of the signal input from the HD SDI INPUT connector are recorded SDI CH34 MODE2 Channels 3 and 4 of the signal input from the HD SDI INPUT connector are recorded SDI all MODE3 Channels 1 to 4 of the signal input from the HD SDI INPUT connector are recorded AES CH12 MODE4 Channels 1 and 2 of the signal input fromthe AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connector are recorded AES CH34 MODES Channels 3 and 4 of the signal input fromthe AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connector are recorded AES all MODE6 Channels 1 to 4 of the signal input from the AUDIO INPU
202. igital signals in AES EBU format for channels 1 to 4 AUDIO OUTPUT AES EBU connectors BNC Outputs digital signals in AES EBU format for channels 1 through 4 HD SDI SDI video audio INPUT connectors BNC The left connector accepts HD SDI video audio signals Note The INPUT MONITOR connector is for use with an input monitor and does not follow the standards for output HD SDI SDI video audio OUTPUT connectors BNC Outputs up to four 1 to 4 HD SDI video audio signal lines Character data such as time codes are superimposed on the signal from the MONITOR connector when the ALT CHARA SUPER setting in the TC menu is set SDTI OPTION IN connector BNC Outputs a video audio SDTI signal This connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Board is installed SDTI OPTION OUT connector BNC Inputs a video audio SDTI signal This connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Board is installed 2 15 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls s O U0D pue Sed jo SUORDUN pue suoqeo0 z sejdeyg NN S 01 U09 pUe Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z Jaldeuo 2 3 Connector Panel AUDIO INPUT LEVEL 600Q termination switches The termination switches should be set for in ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connector according to the audio input level and input impedance Use OFF for low input levels when Audio input level is 60 dBu microphone input
203. ignals for 24F mode and 30F mode should be locked as illustrated below HD SDI Line 1 frame i or i gt i external HD Ref l l Exetrnal SD Ref l l lt gt F Line 4 10 lines 1 1 frame i eTri level sync signal 1125 59 94i 3 58 black burst signal 525 59 94i 2 3 mu Pull down output phase lock When an optional HKDV 507D HD Pull Down Board is installed and item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to lock the phase of the pull dowm otuput signal can be locked as illustrated below 23 976PsF I z 2 frames delay 59 94i Output delay When an optional HKDV 507 HD Pull Down Board is installed or when an optional HKDV 507D HD Pull Down Board is installed and item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to off or lock1 the phase of the output delay for conversion is as illustrated below However when the HKDV 507D board is installed and item AOS is set to lock1 pull down output is locked to the external reference signal 525 black burst signal 23 976PsF No 2 No 1 en oem aa er ee celep 07 02 A frame noo Pil I LIII bid Variable 11 I delay tt Pull down audio output Audio signal multiplexed to the pull down HD SDI output si
204. ime data display window in the menu display Note If the 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE setting in the VTR SETUP menu is set to dial direct initial speed settings cannot be made Change the 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE setting to via search key 5 Press the PREROLL button and PREVIEW button simultaneously The tape is prerolled and played back at the initial speed from the preroll point to the speed variation start point The moment the tape passes the speed variation start point the MEMORY indicator in the display starts flashing The Windicator appears in the time data display window indicating that tape speed memorization in DMC mode is active 6 Rotate the search dial to the position for the desired playback speed The speed variation is stored in memory while the MEMORY indicator is flashing T Press the STOP button to stop the tape If the MEMORY indicator frashes before the tape reaches the speed variation end point Memory has been exceeded and the VTR cannot store any more data for playback speed variations Notes on the W indicator and the MEMORY indicator The Windicator shows that the tape speed memorization in DMC mode is taking place The MEMORY indicator flashes during playback speed memorization then stays lit continuously when memorization of the playback speed has been completed Performing DMC playback There are two methods of starting DMC playback e Starting playback at the on
205. imes normal tape speed 1 15 to 2 45 1 15 to 2 45 times normal tape speed When an editing control unit such as BVE 9100 is connected for DT editing select 1 15 to 2 45 305 EDIT FIELD select 1F 1F 2F Selects the start timing for editing when performing tape editing 1F Start editing from field 1 and end on field 2 2F Start editing from field 2 and end on field 1 1F 2F Following received timing commands When the system frequency of this unit is PSF mode the unit always operates with the F1 setting 306 SYNCHRONIZE accurate rough off When this unit is used as a controller for editing control of another VTR connected through a 9 pin remote cable this selects whether or not to carry out phase synchronization of the two VTRs and also the editing accuracy when carrying out synchronization accurate Editing is carried out with an accuracy of 0 frames rough Editing is carried out with an accuracy of 1 frame off Synchronization is not carried out A 24 Appendix Item number Item Settable range Function Items 311 through 315 describe the analog audio edit preset during editing mentioned on right The follwing items specifies the allocation of each channel for the analog audio preset of the editor or remote controller when the digital audio signals from the VTR is edited on an editor BVE 600 etc or re
206. imposition of character information on off to the HD SDI output and HD SD converter output ALT F7 CHARA H POS Changes the superimposition position horizontal 0 15 ALT F8 CHARA V POS Changes the superimposition position vertical 0 23 ALT F9 VITC POS 1 Selects the VITC insertion line in the HD SD 12 20 NTSC converter output 9 22 PAL ALT F10 VITC POS 2 12 20 NTSC 9 22 PAL 4 3 1 Setting the Time Data TIMER REMAIN T CH COND TC TIMER SEL RESET SET HOLD a ea E TIMER TCR VITC 2FD Fi RESET The display shows the following types of time data C 0 Ii H 04 58s Uu TIMER Time data for Indication Superimposed Time data type Ei edit points display TIMER TCR LTC TCR The LTC value read by the 4 time code reader durin 7 SEL SOURCE MODE MODE DF NDF VITC playback TCR VITC TCR The VITC value read by the time code reader during playback TCG TCG The value generated by the time code generator during recording CTL CTL The number of CTL signals on the tape during recording playing UBR LTC UBR The user bits value read by the time code reader LTC during playback UBR VITC UBR The user bits value read by the time code reader VITC during playback UBG UBG The user bits value generated by the time code generator during recording DUR DUR Appears whenever a duration between any two edit points IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points is displayed
207. in the PF1 2 menus Those items that can be registered in a PF menu are displayed in the scrollable PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu For details on the VTR SETUP menu items see the Appendix Menu List on page A 15 For details on registering items to the PF 1 2 menus see Section 4 1 3 Registering Items to the PF 1 2 Menus on page 4 3 PREV CH COND UTR SETUP CATEG C TCR 00 00 00 00 Ne DEO CATEG H02 DRUM HOURS 10 E e H12 DRUM HOURS r 21 H13 TAPE HOURS r 10 H14 THRED COUNT r 93 001 PRE READ OE 002 CONFI OTF 003 REC INH ORE 004 CAP LOCK 4FD CHANGE CANCEL SAVE DATA EXIT CL LJL VTR SETUP menu display VTR SETUP menu Button Indication Function F1 PREV CATEG Moves to the beginning ofthe previous category F2 NEXT CATEG Moves to the beginning of the next category F7 CHANGE DATA Changesthe setting F9 CANCEL Cancels the setting operation F10 SAVE EXIT Sets the value and exits the VTR SETUP menu Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 63 ki won Ba WN sum s nu y p 4ay deuD HN 4 7 SET UP Menu Scrolling items in the VTR SETUP menu Press the Aland Mito scroll the items in the VTR SETUP menu To search the menu by category Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into categories according to type of settings they perform Menu Category number H01 Items related to the hours meter 001 Items relatedto VTR operations 101
208. in remote control enable mode enable The AUTO button operates in remote control mode INPUT CHECK disable disable The INPUT CHECK button is disabled in remote enable control mode enable The INPUT CHECK button operates in remote control mode MENU amp CURSOR disable disable The menu buttons andthe cursor control buttons enable are disabled in remote control mode enable The menu buttons and the cursor control buttons operate in remote control mode AUDIO INPUT disable disable The AUDIO INPUT button is disabled in remote enable control mode enable The AUDIO INPUT button operates in remote control mode MONITOR disable disable The MONITOR button is disabled in remote control enable mode enable The MONITOR button operates in remote control mode A 18 Appendix item number Item Seittable range Function 017 PB EE SELECT Selects output video and audio signals MENU Sub items STAND BY OFF PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals in the standby EE EE off mode PB MU The playback video signal is output The audio outputis muted EE EE Theinput video and audio signals are output STAND BY ON PB MU Selects the video and audio output signals in the standby EE EE on mode EE MU PB MU The playback video signalis output The audio outputis muted EE EE The inputvideo and au
209. int Data eee eseeeeseenseceseceseceeeeeneeenees 4 38 4 4 4 Prerolling to a Cue Point oo eee eeeeseneeeeecneecnseceeeeneeenes 4 39 4 4 5 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point eee 4 40 4 4 6 Backspace Editing 20 0 cee cceeseeceeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeceeaeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 40 424 7 TELE FILE Menu is csccouscuts eee ceeneta sissies eeecicisueereeieeeek te 4 4 4 5 PF1 Menu Factory Settings csscsssscssssscsssscssssesssesssescsssees 4 55 4 5 1 Selecting the Input Video Signal VIDEO IN 4 56 4 5 2 Selecting the Reference Signal SERVO REP 4 56 4 5 3 Adjusting the Output Video Signal MASTER LEVEL to FINE 0 cececceeeeecesecnreeeeereeseceeeeee 4 56 4 6 PF2 Menu Factory Settings csscsssscssssscsssscsscsesssesssescsseses 4 59 4 6 1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal A IN CH 1 CH4 4 60 4 6 2 Setting Emphasis EMPHASIS 00 eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneee 4 60 4 6 3 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal MON L SEL MON CR SEL cece ceecceeeeseeeneeeneeeneeeeeaes 4 60 AT SET UP Mein ths sicscccesscscssvssnssosoonsnsessonsstdevevessestssssuetenetooasuomsosnnestentes 4 61 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu ereinen 4 63 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Mentra eie eannan 4 65 2 Table of Contents Chapter 5 Recording Playback Chapter 6 Editing 5 1 Preparing for Recording ccccscsssscssssccsssscsscccsesssssssssssecssssceees 5 1 5 1 1 Setting Switches and Menus cece eeeeeseeseeereeeneceeeeeeeeaee
210. ional equipment is different in VTRs A and B the VTR SETUP menu settings are preserved e Even though the VTR SETUP menu settings are copied to VTR C after being copied to VTR B the settings from VTR A are copied to VTR C e Even though settings are copied for optional equipment that is not present the settings are adjusted and processed by the VTR internally Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 13 a i WN sbulyjas nusy p saldeyo NI The HOME menu sets the basic VTR operation conditions for recording playback and editing The HOME TC PF1 and PF2 menus show information that includes the VTR operation mode time code of the current position and time code type etc To activate the HOME menu Press the HOME button To change the HOME menu page Press the ALT button Channel condition Tape remaining PB EE Operation mode a m oO z T ASSEM BLE TCR 01H 04m AIN 00 01 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 PLAY 2F D 1 00F AOUT 9g0 02 10 00 OUT G0 02 10 00 INS TE INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off HOME Name of the displayed menu Title of the current VTR SETUP menu Capstan lock mode Servo lock status HOME menu display For details on time codes refer to 4 3 TC Menu on page 4 20 4 1 4 Chapter 4 Menu Settings
211. jo age HMI Table of Contents ee e eee eee eee ee eee Appendix Maintenance ssssviissssssicesidssosescesdsessacivestoassencsenssesscedsesosavosssonsasessedveoscsoni sos A 1 Head Cleaning n onie e ena acre beaded Cie a AE A 1 Moisture Condensation cccccccessscecssssecesessececeesececessseceessneeeenees A 1 SJE CET COS E EE E T A 2 Operation Information Display e esesesecesoosooesooesooscocssocssoessecesesesesesese A 6 Error Messages and Warning Messages seesecesccesoesooesooccoossosesosesoe A 8 Error Messages anaiss a a a a eA aie A 8 Warning Messages enirnariear o a E Ginn E beh eee A 10 Error Log Men inrteen sashes nnr a E a e A 11 CEIT T aA AAE E S EE EEE EEE E E A 13 Menu List rennene sa E ANE E A 15 Items Related to the Hours Meter HO1 cc ceeeesesteceeeeeeees A 15 Items Related to VTR Operations OO1 neeesser A 16 Items Related to Operation Panels 1015 oo eee ee ceeeeeeeeereeeees A 20 Items Related to Remote Interface 201 oo ceecceeeseeeeeeeeeees A 23 Items Related to Editing 301 oo cee eeeccesceceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees A 24 Items Related to Prerolling 401 0 cee ceecceeeeceeeeeceeteceeeeceeeeees A 27 Items Related to Recording Protection SO1 eeeeeeeeneeeereees A 28 Items Related to the Time Code 601 0 cceccccccccceceeestneees A 29 Items Related to the Video Control 701 wo ceceeceeeeeceeeeeeneees A 34 Items Related to the Audio Control 801 cce
212. k CLR button 2 6 7 Io olo 2 9 0 m 4381 5 Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory bank 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the VTR BANK button The VTR BANK menu appears in the display UTR BANK FOOTBALL TCR 00 00 00 00 1 UTR BANK amp LUTIR BANK UNDO CURRENT SETUPS SETUP BANK co BASEBALL og ea 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 Preset 5 Preset 6 Preset 7 FOOTBALL 8 Preset g Preset S EDIT DIREC TITLE TION COPY EXIT C a el j 3 Press the DIRECTION button or press the or buttons twice to select the direction 4 Press the KX button to move the cursor P to CURRENT SETUP C then press the EDIT TITLE button to add a title to the current menu settings of the VTR For details refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 5 Press the button to move the cursor P to SETUP BANK then press the A or M button to move the cursor to the number of the VTR memory bank to be used for saving the current menu settings 6 Press the COPY button A message appears in the display asking you to confirm the operation To cancel the storage operation Press the CLR button Press the COPY button while holding down the SFT button The current menu settings are stored to the
213. l in 0 25 dB increments The center LED lights up in each meter as a signal level reference When the level exceeds the maximum display value the top LED flashes When the level falls below the minimum display value the bottom LED flashes 2 2 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls PHONES jack Connects stereo headphones with 8 Q impedance for audio monitoring during recording playback and editing Adjust the headphone output level with the PHONES level control POWER switch Turns on the power When the power is turned on the audio level meters and menu display in the lower control panel light up PHONES level control Adjusts the output level to the PHONES jack You can enable this control to simultaneously adjust the output level to the MONITOR OUTPUT connectors on the connector panel For details see Section 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals on page 5 2 PB playback level controls Adjust the level of the audio output for channels 1 to 4 and the cue channel Pull out the controls during playback to adjust the audio output for each channel Push in again for factory set levels 4 dB output for a signal recorded at a reference level of 0 dB When pushed in the controls cannot adjust the audio output level O REC recording level controls Adjust the recording level for channels 1 to 4 and the cue channel Pull out the controls to adjust the recording level for each channel in E E
214. l of the MONITOR OUTPUT connector to be adjusted with the PHONES level control on the upper control panel For more information refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual Selecting non audio data as the audio input signal Do the procedure below to select non audio data such as a Dolby E or Dolby Digital AC 3 signal as the audio input signal T Use item 819 NO AUDIO MODE Select and item 820 NON AUDIO Channel Select to select the audio input signal INPUT SELECT button The button of the selected channel flashes 2 Press the INPUT SELECT button and verify that the flashing AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT button matches the channel selected in step 1 When you select non audio data as the audio input signal e The audio input signal cannot be switched e The OVER indication on the audio level meters flashes e Analog audio output to the main line monitor and the headphones are muted e The recording level cannot be adjusted using the REC level controls 1 Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories 2 AC 3 is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories 5 1 3 Adjusting the Audio Recording Level Adjusting the recording level Recording with the reference level If the REC level controls on the upper control panel are pushed in audio signals are recorded at the reference level 0 dB reference level indicated in t
215. lay in full the message selected with the cursor on off F5 WARNING Display warning messages on off F6 ERROR Display error messages on off F7 CONDITION Display condition messages on off F9 TIME Toggle between time code are real time display TC REAL F10 EXIT Return to display of maintenance information SFT F4 ALL CLEAR Clear messages LOG DATA ALT F8 CANCEL EDIT Display the CANCEL EDIT screen ALT F9 REAL TIME Display the REAL TIME screen For more information about error log menu settings refer to the Maintenance Manual Appendix A 1 1 xipueddy Error Messages and Warning Messages eS _____ ____ Clearing warning messages 1 Press the ALT F8 CANCEL EDIT button 2 Select the message to be cleared using the Al and M buttons 3 Press the MARK button An asterisk will appear in front of the message The message will not be displayed or saved Cancelling removal To cancel the removal of a warning message press the MARK button Adjusting the clock Press the ALT REAL TIME button in the error log menu and use the setting below Get current time codes Hold down the SFT button and press the GET TC button Setting the data and time Hold down the SFT button and press the SET button Use the K and l buttons to move the bar to the location to be adjusted Use the numeric keys to change the value Adjusting minutes and second to zero Hold down the SFT but
216. layback See also LTC Menu List Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into categories according to type of setting they perform Descriptions on each item are given below e Items related to the hours meter H0O1 e Items related to VTR operations 001 e Items related to operation panels 101 e Items related to the remote interface 201 e Items related to editing 301 e Items related to prerolling 401 e Items related to recording protection 501 e Items related to the time code 601 e Items related to the video control 701 e Items related to the audio control 801 e Items related to digital process 901 e Items related to pull down control A01 e Other items TO1 For details on the VTR SETUP menu refer to 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu on page 4 61 Items Related to the Hours Meter H01 Item number Item Function H01 OPERATION Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been turned on and operated HOURS H02 DRUM RUNNING Displays the total number of hours that the drum has rotated with tape threaded HOURS H03 TAPE RUNNING Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback fast forwarding HOURS rewinding jog shuttle variable speed and edit modes Does not include still mode H04 THREADING Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings COUNTER H12 DRUM RUNNING Displays the total number of hours that the drum ha
217. layback concierne Sine Save eee cece eels bebe sees 5 14 5 4 5 Playing Back Non audio Data 0 eee eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 16 5 4 6 Output of Pull Down Signal 20 0 ee eee eeeceeneceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 5 16 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing ccssccssscssssccsssscsssccssssssssssssseccsssssees 6 1 6 1 1 Overview of Automatic Editing 0 eee ceseceneeereeeees 6 1 6 1 2 Setting Switches and Menus cles ceeeeeeeeseeereeeseceeeeeeeees 6 2 6 1 3 Selecting the Edit Mode oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceeceeeeeeeeaes 6 3 621 4 Setting Edit Pomts ic hesitates lute ke tees 6 3 6 1 5 Editing Non audio Data 0 eee ceceeeeeeeeesecesecnseceeeeeneeenes 6 7 6 1 6 Confirming Edit Points oe eee ceeeeeeeeeceeecesecesecneeeeeeeeaee 6 8 6 1 7 Cuing Up and Prerolling eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecnsecneeeeeeenes 6 8 6 1 8 Previe WING 3 seis as re en Ginn eat eae 6 9 6 1 9 Modifying Edit Points 20 eeeeeeceseceeeceseeeseeeeeeseeeseeees 6 10 6 1 10 Performing Automatic Editing eee eeeeseeseeseeeeeees 6 12 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing cscssssccssscsssscssscssssscsssscssssees 6 15 6 2 1 Performing DMC Editing 0 eee ceeceeeeeneeeeeeneeeneeees 6 15 6 2 2 Animation Editing 2 0 0 ee aenieiai ine 6 17 6 2 3 Performing Preread Editing eee ee eeeeceseeeeeeneeeneeenaeees 6 18 6 3 Manual Editing sccccseccsenacsscosssscessesessossssescossnssesvsassssestescosessesesesse 6 19 Table of Contents 3 eee WN s Us U0D
218. lights up 2 Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the CLR button to delete the corresponding edit point The edit point is deleted and appears in the menu display Moving an edit point position by one 2 Press the or button then use the numeric frame at atime buttons to enter the value to be added or subtracted CH COND HOME 1 PB EE GREEN Entered value B PLAY LOCK i i Ter IEF is displayed O14 04m 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 F gt wn no m T BLE IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 PLAYER m O14 04n 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 E i o off IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE 2 3 off off Loff Lort Lor ier J Moving an edit point position by one frame at a time To cancel the entered value Press the CLR button 1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR on which to modify the edit point 3 Press the SET button The button lights up The result of the addition or subtraction is entered 2 Press the or button while holding down the IN SET is OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button displayed CH CON HOME Pressing the or button moves the edit point by PB EE GREEN one frame forwa
219. ll move to the line specified by the numeric buttons 4 50 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 2 Press the F4 CHANGE DATA button SCENE No EDIT BIBCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUWXYZ abcdefshjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 5 1 U4R _ HDID2CAM SAVE EXIT C BACK SPACE SPACE a i SET LETTER b 3 Press the K or l button to select a character SCENE No EDIT ABC DEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUUXYZ abcdefshjiklmnoparstuvwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 17 51 H4R _ HDID2ZCAM BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT rs a E L 4 Press the SET LETTER button or the center cursor button The selected character is entered SCENE No EDIT BE AGC DEFGHI JKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ abcdefghjiklmnoparstuvuwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 7 7 1 SU _ HDID2CAM BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER CANCEL EXIT ee ee Lj 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters To enter a space Press the F5 SPACE button If you enter a wrong character Press the F6 BACK SPACE button to go back Then re enter the character To start the procedure over again Press the F9 CANCEL button to start again To c
220. lled off The pull down output signal and down converted output signal are not synchronized with external SD EXT SD reference signal lock1 The pulldown output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with external SD EXT SD reference signal lock2 The pull down output signal and down converted output signal are synchronized with external SD EXT SD reference signal When the PB EE modeis selected the amount of delay onthe A frame of the pull down output signal forthe A frame of the main video signal is fixed to 2 frames 59 94i e Awarning message appears when the HD reference signal and external SD EX SD reference signal are not input or the HD reference signal and external SD reference signal are notsynchronized lock1 and lock2 are effective only when the operation mode of this unitis setto 23 98PsF A 44 Appendix litem number item Settable range Function A06 PD off When item 620 and AO3is setto on specifies whether or SUPERIMPOSED on notthe ID 24F 30F is displayed to the right of TIME CODE ID superimposed time code off No ID is displayed on ID 24F or S0F is displayed The setting of this item is effective only when the operation mode of this unitis setto 23 98PsF or 24PsF A07 PD CHARACTER off When item 620 and A03 is setto on specifies whether or 24F TIME CODE on notthe 2 3 pull down 24 frame time
221. ller HKDV 506A SDTI Board HKDV 507 507D HD Pull Down Board BKDW 509 Parallel 50 pin Interface Kit RMM 110 Rack Mount Adaptor BCT HD12CL Cleaning Cassette MLB 1B 100 Memory Label Recommended accessories For details about recommended accessories contact your Sony service representative Parallel serial converter HD 694 equivalent from ASTRO DESIGN Corporation XLR BNC adaptors BCJ XP TRA equivalent from CANARE Corporation Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Appendix A 5 xipueddy Operation Information Display Information on the operational status of the unit and discrepancies between the field frequency of the tape and that of the unit can be shown in the display CH COND DIGITAL HOME PB EE GREEN E TCR PLAY 4FD F1 E 01a 04 58s OOF AIN 00 00 00 00 AOUT 00 00 00 00 IN_00 00 00 00 OUT 00 00 00 00 ASSEM BLE off OPERATION INFO INS 60Hz gt 60Hz TC Cart INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE off off off off off off FREQ VIDEO INT SG CB AUDIO INT SG silnc Operation information The operation information can be viewed in any menu except the CUE or SET UP menu Selecting items to be displayed Use 121 INFORMATION DISPLAY in the VTR SETUP menu to select the items to be displayed The items and the functions that can be set
222. lower control panel editing operations section 2 7 lower control panel menu operations section 2 5 lower control panel search operations section 2 11 lower control panel tape transport section 2 9 upper control panel 2 2 CONTROL PANEL connector 2 16 CONTROL PANEL switch 2 13 Conversion selecting conversion mode 5 7 5 8 time code in 24F mode 4 34 time code in 25F mode 4 29 HD SD conversion mode Edge crop 5 7 Letter box mode 5 7 Squeeze mode 5 7 Cross fade editing A 25 CTL timer 4 24 CUE menu 4 35 Cue point changing into an edit point 4 40 erasing 4 38 prerolling 4 39 registrating 4 36 Cut editing A 26 D D CONV OUT OPTION SYNC connector 2 15 D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector 2 15 D CONV SDI OUT OPTION connectors 2 16 Deleting edit points 6 10 DISPLAY FULL FINE button 2 2 Displaying the duration 6 8 DMC editing overview 6 15 performing 6 15 setting edit points and playback speed 6 15 DMC playback overview 5 14 performing 5 15 DF Drop frame mode 4 25 4 26 E Editing See Automatic editing Edit point confirming 6 8 deleting 6 10 modifying 6 10 moving a position by one frame at a time 6 11 setting 6 3 recalling 4 19 Editing precautions 6 1 Effective scanning line number 5 8 EJECT button 2 9 Ejecting the cassette 3 8 EMPHASIS 4 60 ENTRY button 2 8 Error Messages A 8 Error Log Menu A 11 Clearing warning messages A 12 Adjusting the clock A 12 EXTEND mode 4 36 F G Fade
223. m 1035 to 1080 preserving the aspect ratio of the image EY S 1035 gt 1080 PANEL Convert the effective scanning line number from 1035 to 1080 The 1035 lines of the image are inserted into the 1035 lines of 1080 lines then it is horizontally compressed 1035 5 3 5 Improving the Vertical Resolution during Slow Motion Playback when HKDV 502 is installed When the optional HKDV 502 HD Line Converter Board is installed in the HDW F500 to activate the function to improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback follow the procedure below 1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of a small pointed object ROM CH COND MAINTE INFO VER TCR 00 00 00 00 ee MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY Los Y OPERATION 529HOURS DRUM RUNNING 34HOURSL 26H E TAANE Sauauinet ae TH SH OPERATION INFO FREQ 59 941 LINE 10801035 CONV OPTION MAINTE INFO EXEC ERLT L_ A JC 2 Press the F8 MAINTE EXEC button while holding down the SFT button CH COND MAINTENANCE TCR 00 00 00 00 ROM MAINTENANCE Y OPERATION 529HOURS PANEL DRUM RUNNING 34HOURSI 26H MAINT TAPE TRAVEL 20HOURSI 16H THREADING 7B0TIMESL 449H1 CHECK v DT SAT RF A U OTHERS EXIT CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CACARACA 3 Press the FI OTHERS
224. m revolution time total tape running time and total number of threadings and unthreadings Self diagnosis This function allows the VTR to perform self diagnostics when a malfunction occurs An error message is displayed and a history of all errors that have occurred is recorded Easy to maintain plug in boards The VTR uses plug in circuit boards to simplify servicing and inspection Mountable in standard 19 inch rack The unit can be mounted in an EJA standard 19 inch rack For rack mounting refer to the Maintenance Manual 1 1 2 Features of the Control Panel The BKDW 515 Control Panel provides six menu screens corresponding to the six operation modes to allow fast and easy adjustment of necessary settings as well as the ability to store menu settings to a memory card for later recall Menu driven operations for a variety of purposes Six menus are displayed on the 90 x 72 mm 3 s inches x 2 7 s inches screen and are set using the 10 function keys HOME menu Use this menu to make the basic settings for recording playback and editing operations and to select channels to be edited during insert editing TC menu Use this menu to make time code settings CUE menu Use this menu to set up to 100 cue points In page mode 10 cue points per page can be set on a total of 10 pages In TELE FILE menu you can change the setting for the memory label system Tele File PF1 PF2 Personal Function menus Use these m
225. ment 3 1 1 Making Digital Connections This example shows how to connect the HDD HDDP with the HDW F500 acting as the recorder in the 1000 1 inch HD Digital VTR and use it as the player 59 941 or 60i mode REMOTE 9Pin HDD HDDP 1000 50 PIN PARALLEL DIGITAL AUDIO pE XLR BNC DIGITAL VIDEO Converter OUTPUT CH 3 4 P S Converter HD SDI OUTPUT 9 pin remote cable HD SDI OUTPUT REMOTE 1 IN 9P Video monitor HD serial monitor Making digital connections Refer to the Specifications section in the appendix page A 2 for recommended XLR BNC and P S converters Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 1 P iY xe D oo Yn D pr gt Co Cc xe mph g lt J YLA eul dn Bullles g Jeldeyo HA 3 1 Connecting External Equipment 3 1 2 Making HD Analog Connections This example shows how to connect the VTR when using HD analog audio and video signals in the 60i mode HDV 10 1 2 inch VTR REMOTE 9P or other player ANALOG AUDIO L OUTPUT CH 1 to 4 ANALOG VIDEO OUTPUT HKPF 101 A D Converter HD SDI OUTPUT 9 pin remote cable HD SDI OUTPUT HKPF 102 D A Converter
226. menu For details on storing cue point data refer to 4 1 5 Memory Card Function on page 4 6 To activate the CUE menu Press the CUE button Cue point data is factory set to be erased when a cassette is inserted To select whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is inserted inserted Press the M CUE CLEAR button to select whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is on Erase cue point data off Do not erase cue point data Page number indication Data entry window PREV REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min EOS 00 00 00 00TCR 00 00 00 00 NEXT I AM CUE TITLE e Title PAGE i 3 4 5 6 TELE 7 FILE 8 9 CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR C CoA Cue point indication CUE menu display CUE menu Button Indication Function Settings F1 PREV PAGE Shows the previous page F2 NEXT PAGE Shows the next page F4 TELE FILE Opens the TELE FILE menu F5 CUE P ROLL Specifies the preroll time to a cue point Oto 30s F8 PAGE SET Specifies the page number F9 CUENUM SET Specifies the cue number F10 M CUE CLEAR Erases cue point data when a cassette is inserted on off ALT F8 PAGE MODE Selects PAGE mode ALT F9 EXTEND MODE Selects EXTEND mode Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 35 suas nueyy p seydeyp Il sbulyjas nuay p sajdeyo NMI 4
227. mer counter display and status information time data amp UB Timer counter display and user bits time data amp CTL Timer counter display and CTL time data amp VITC Timer counter display and VITC time data only Timer counter display only A 32 Appendix Item number 627 Item CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at dual line mode Settable range off on Function When item 626 is set to anything other than time data only this item specifies whether warning messages flash on the second line or not off Warning messages do not flash on If a warning message exists it flashes e Messages that have been cleared are not displayed For more information about clearing warning messages see Clearing warning messages on page A 12 When there are multiple warning messages each message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next message 628 REMAIN TIME DISPLAY off 10min on Sets whether to display remaining time on the tape in superimposed charecter position off Do not display remaining time 10 min Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or less on Always display remaining time The remaining time on the tape is not displayed when no cassette is inserted The remaining time is not also displayed until the VTR finishes detecting the diameter of the wound tape and estimating the remaining time immediately after the cassette is inserted 630 TC CO
228. mote controller with digital audio edit preset control functions 311 ANALOG AUDIO no definition Sets the channel 1 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF EDIT PRESET analog ch 1 according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor REPLACE FOR analog ch 2 or remote controller CH 1 analog ch 1 ch 2 no definition Not defined analog ch 1 As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset analog ch 2 As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset analog ch 1 ch 2 As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2 preset 312 ANALOG AUDIO no definition Sets the channel 2 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF EDIT PRESET analog ch 1 according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor REPLACE FOR analog ch 2 or remote controller CH 2 analog ch 1 ch2 no definition Not defined analog ch 1 As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset analog ch 2 As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset analog ch 1 ch 2 As determined by analog channel 1 or analog channel 2 preset 313 ANALOG AUDIO no definition Sets the channel 3 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF EDIT PRESET analog ch 1 according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor REPLACE FOR analog ch 2 or remote controller CH3 analog ch 1 ch 2 no definition Not defined analog ch 1 As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset analog ch 2 As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset
229. n Improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback off Do not improve the vertical resolution during slow motion playback 5 10 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 4 Playback There are four types of playback e Normal speed playback e Jog Shuttle Variable mode playback e Capstan override playback e DMC Dynamic Motion Control playback 5 4 1 Normal Speed Playback Follow the procedure below to play back at normal speed Normal speed playback 1 Insert a cassette For details on inserting a cassette see Section 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes on page 3 8 2 Press the PLAY button Playback starts and the SERVO indicator lights up to indicate that the servo is locked 3 Press the STOP button to stop playback If playback continues to the end of the tape If item 407 AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP menu is set to ON then the tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and stops 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback In Jog Shuttle Variable modes you can change the playback speed as follows Jogmode The playback speed corresponds to the rotational speed of the search dial ranging from 1 to 1 or 2 to 2 times normal playback speed The speed setting can be changed in the VTR SETUP menu using item 107
230. n low level noise within the signal The effect edit mode minimizes the production of this noise Note however that a slight loss in picture resolution may be observed in this mode Emphasis Emphasizing the high frequencies of a signal before processing pre emphasis and de emphasizing those high frequencies before output de emphasis This reduces deterioration of the signal to noise ratio in the high frequency range External synchronization A method to maintain color subcarrier phase continuity by performing editing in two frame units in order to achieve stable video without horizontal fluctuation at the edit points For editing a recorder VTR or master VTR and a player VTR or source VTR or slave VTR are used and external synchronization is commonly used to ensure that the operation timing control signals and time reference signals are synchronized Insert editing An edit mode for inserting new scenes into the middle of previously recorded scenes CTL signals previously recorded on the tape are used Consequently this mode cannot be used for blank tapes This mode assumes that CTL signals have somehow be recorded to the tape already See also Assemble editing Longitudinal time code See LTC LTC Abbreviation for Longitudinal Time Code This is the time code recorded onto a longitudinal track of the tape During the playback of still pictures LTC cannnot be read since the tape is not moving During slow pla
231. n when the power is turned off A 46 Appendix A AC IN connector 2 15 ACCESS button 2 6 Adjusting audio playback level 5 6 output video signal 4 58 recording level 5 3 ALARM indicator 2 6 ALT button 2 6 Assemble editing 4 17 6 3 AUDIO IN OUT buttons 2 8 AUDIO INPUT connectors 2 16 AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors 2 15 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL 600 termination switches 2 16 AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons 2 4 Audio level meters 2 3 AUDIO OUTPUT connectors 2 16 AUDIO OUTPUT AES EBU connectors 2 15 AUTO button 2 8 Automatic edit modes 6 1 Automatic editing Animation editing 6 17 Backspace editing 4 40 confirming edit points 6 8 cuing up and prerolling 6 8 DMC editing 6 15 modifying edit points 6 10 6 13 non audio data 6 7 overview of automatic editing 6 1 performing editing 6 12 6 14 preread editing 6 18 previewing 6 9 selecting the edit mode 6 3 setting edit points 6 3 setting switches and menus 6 2 steps in automatic editing 6 1 Backspace editing 4 40 BREAKER button 2 15 C Capstan override playback 5 14 Cassettes handling cassettes 3 8 inserting and ejecting cassettes 3 8 preventing accidental erasure 3 9 recommended cassettes 3 8 Changing menu settings 4 2 preroll time 6 9 Confirming edit points 6 8 Connecting external equipment Cascade connection 3 4 making HD analog connections 3 2 making digital connections 3 1 making NTSC PAL Digital Connections 3 3 Connector panel 2 14 Control panel
232. nated between 2 and 3 fields when recording films In the FILM mode this setting is made automatically When an edit ends as in the CG mode the next IN and OUT points are set automatically film is selectable only when the frame frequency of the VTR is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz Follow the procedure below to perform animation editing Performing animation editing 1 2 Set the IN point The OUT point is set automatically Press the AUTO button The button lights up Press the PREVIEW REVIEW button to preview Press the REC EDIT button Automatic editing starts When the edit completes the OUT point automatically becomes the next IN point and the next OUT point is set automatically Repeat Steps 3 to 4 to perform animation editing Chapter 6 Editing 6 17 Bupa 93 dey9 HAI 6 2 Advanced Automatic Editing 6 2 3 Performing Preread Editing Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing This type of editing is called preread editing as the VTR uses preread heads to read signals in advance Signals that are read in advance can be sent to mixers for mixing then recorded to the original channels or other digital audio channels The preread editing settings are performed with the ALT PRE READ buttons in the HOME menu For details on the settings refer to 4 2 4 Preread Settings PREREAD on page 4 17
233. nector and the 3 SUPER connector of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION off No information is superimposed on Information is superimposed Appendix A 3 1 xipueddy Menu List Item number 622 Item CHARACTER H POSITION Settable range 0 8 15 Function Sets the horizontal position of text information superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector the 3 SUPER connector of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors A setting of 0 displays the information at the left edge of the screen and the position moves to the right as the setting is increased There are 16 possible settings from 0 to 15 623 CHARACTER V POSITION 22 23 Sets the vertical position of text information superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT the D CONV OUT OPTION COMPOSITE SUPER connector the 3 SUPER connector of D CONV SDI OUT OPTION and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors A setting of 0 displays the information at the bottom of the screen and the position moves up as the setting is increased There are 24 possible settings from 0 to 23 If two line display is selected in item 626 sometimes the second line will disappear in the middle of the screen 624 CHARACTER TYPE without BG outlined translucent withBG Sets the style of
234. ng playback the CTL signal recorded on the tape or during recording the CTL signal being recorded on the tape is counted and the tape running time is displayed in hours minutes seconds and frames TC The time code value read by the time code reader or the time code value generated by the time code generator is displayed Use item 603 to toggle between VITC and LTC UBIT The user bits inserted in the playback time code or the user bits inserted in the being recorded are displayed Use item 603 to toggle between VITC and LTC 603 TCR MODE select LTC auto VITC Selects the time code read by the time code reader during playback LTC LTC is read auto If the playback speed is from 1 2 to 1 2 normal speed VITC is read and if outside this range LTC is read VITC VITC is read 604 TAPE TIMER DISPLAY 12H 24H Selects whether the CTL counter operates in 12 hour display mode or 24 hour display mode 12H 12 hour display mode 24H 24 hour display mode In the 12 hour display the tens digit of the hours value is dropped 605 VITC SOURCE TCG VIN Selects the source for VITC to be written to the AUX data area of video signals TCG Write the signals generated by this unit s internal time code generator to the VITC V IN Write the VITC of video signals input to this unit to the VITC A 29 Appendix xipueddy
235. nsport at speeds of 1 0 5 0 5 1 0 and 2 0 times normal speed 113 DT MODE field 1 to 1 Sets the DT operation mode frame field 1 to 1 Enters the field playback mode Field DT mode when the tape speed is 1 to 1 times normal speed Enters the frame playback mode Flame DT mode when the tape speed is 1 to 2 times normal speed frame Enters the frame playback mode Frame DT mode 114 POWER ON MENU home menu Selects the menu displayed when the unitis powered on select TC menu CUE menu PF1 menu PF2menu ALT PF1 menu ALT PF2 menu 115 KEY BEEP high Selects the volume of the key click sound low off 116 ALARM BEEP high Selects the volume of the key click sound low off 117 SCREEN SAVER 3min Selects the time after which the screen saver function 10min operates 60 min off 118 INPUT GUARD off Selects the mode in which the INPUT SELECT buttons on select on the front panel switch video and audio inputs off The INPUT SELECT buttons on the front panel can switch the video and audio inputs on The INPUT SELECT buttons on the front panel are inhibited from switching the video and audio inputs However itis possible to check the INPUT SELECT display andto carry out MONITOR SELECT switching A 21 Appendix xipueddy Menu List
236. ntents ofthe Commentsection F4 CHANGE DATA Modifies the specified data F5 DEL POINT Deletes the time data ofthe cue point F6 MARK Changes the data in the Mrk section F7 PROTECT Write protects the cue point data F8 TAPE INFO Displays the TAPE INFORMATION window F9 CUENUM POINT Moves the cursortothe line specified by the numeric buttons F10 WRITE EXIT Closes the TELE FILE menu after saving changes tothe memory label ALT F1 FORMAT T Fil Formats the memory label ALT F2 UNDO ALL Undoes all changes ALT F3 ATTRIB EDIT Changes the ID ADMIN or TITLE data in the TAPE INFORMATION window ALT COPY to CUE Copies the time data of acue pointto another cue point indicated inthe CUE menu ALT T Fil MODE Selects the device to be used for TELE FILE menu operations This setting can be done only whennocassette is inserted inthe VTR ALT F7 WRITE PRTEC Prohibits TELE FILE menu operations ALT WRITE EXIT Closes the TELE FILE menu after saving changes tothe memory label Formatting a memory label 1 Press the ALT F1 FORMAT T Fil buttons 2 Press the F1 FORMAT T Fil button while pressing down the SFT button A message appears in the control
237. o Lock Mode CAP LOCK Press the ALT button then the CAP LOCK button to select the capstan servo lock mode when you edit or play a tape with composite signals 2FD The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields The color framing operation is disabled This is the normal setting for editing or playback of HD or D1 signals 4LOCK The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 4 fields If color frames occur intermittently during playback the capstan servo is locked when the next color frame appears 4HOLD The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 4 fields If color frames occurs intermittently during playback the capstan servo stays locked to that color frame Notes e This setting is only active only when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz e To lock composite signal output to four fields on this VTR select the signal input to the REF IN SD connector as a reference signal e Composite signal output cannot be locked to eight fields on this VTR 4 18 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 2 7 Setting the Preroll Time PREROLL TIME Set the preroll time by pressing the ALT button then press the PREROLL TIME button You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1 second units During editing on this VTR a preroll time of 5 seconds or more is recommended Setting the preroll time 5 lola a90 o u OO OO Deel BEE
238. o enter the current time data 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line where the time code will be written To move the cursor using the numeric buttons With the cursor specifying Time Mrk IN OUT or the recording starting point section in the TELE FILE menu display enter the line number using the numeric buttons Then press the CUENUM POINT button The cursor will move to the line specified by the numeric buttons If the cursor P is not linked with the cursor buttons the cursor gt will not move when the cursor buttons are pressed To link the cursor gt with the cursor buttons Press the center cursor button Each press of the button alternately links and unlinks the cursor P 2 Press the ENTRY button The time data in the column specified by the cursor gt changes to the current time code If the cursor P is not on the screen when the ENTRY button is pressed the time data on the line currently specified by the cursor P changes to the current time data and the line is automatically displayed To insert the current time data on a new line 1 Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor P below the line where the time code will be inserted For details on how to move the cursor see To enter the current time data above 2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the SFT button A new line is inserted above the line specified by where the cursor P is placed and the
239. od but still reproducible Red Playback signal is poor Head cleaning or internal inspection is necessary if the indicator lights up continuously Lights when the VTR is operating under the interlace mode 50i 59 94i 60i PsF Lights when the VTR is operating under the PsF mode 23 98PsF 24PsF 25PsF 29 97PsF 30PsF INTERLACE 23 98 Lights when the VTR is operating with a frame frequency of 23 98 Hz 24 Lights when the VTR is operating with a frame frequency of 24 Hz 25 Lights when the VTR is operating with a frame frequency of 25 Hz 29 97 Lights when the VTR is operating with a frame frequency of 29 97 Hz 30 Lights when the VTR is operating with a frame frequency of 30 Hz Lights when item 821 AUDIO ADVANCE MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to on When edit preset is set to ON the HDW F500 operates internally with off setting so this indicator lights off ADV AUDIO Formore information about the selection of the frame frequency refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual only through the VTR s internal circuitry and not through the magnetic conversion system comprising tape and heads Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 3 g ouoD pUe seg JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo NN 0UOD pue Sed JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 19 deyo A 2 1 Control Panel O INPUT SELECT button Selects the type and channel for the audio input signal
240. off Automatic editing is not repeated on Automatic editing is repeated To stop press the STOP button T02 INTERNAL VIDEO _ off Selects the test signal output by the signal generator built SIGNAL COLOR BARS into the VTR GENERATOR HD MULTIBURST off The test signal is not generated andthe VTR operates 10 STEPS normally PULSE amp BAR allother settings The test signalis output from the VTR At RAMP this time itis also possible to record the signal BLACK T03 INTERNALVIDEO 1035 Selects the effective scanning line number of the test signal SIGNAL LINE 1080 output by the signal generator builtinto the VTR SELECT 1035 Sets the effective scanning line number to 1035 1080 Sets the effective scanning line number to 1080 This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the unit is 29 97 Hz or 30 Hz T04 INTERNALAUDIO _ off Selects the operation of audio test signal output SIGNAL silence off The audio test signal is not output GENERATOR 1 kHz sine silence Mute signal 1 kHz sine 1 kHz In this case a 1 KHz 20 dB FS sine waveis supplied to all audio inputs Note e When silence or 1 kHz sine is selected the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons light up e When the unitis operatedi nthe 23 98 PsF or 24 PsF mode with 1 kHz sine selected the output signal is 960 Hz Items T01 T02 and T04 are reset whenever the power is turned off Item T03 is maintained eve
241. ol panel 2 2 User bits setting 4 24 V VAR button 2 11 Variable mode playback 5 13 Vertical resolution 5 9 VIDEO CONTROL connector 2 16 VITC insertion line setting 4 32 VTR memory banks 4 4 adding titles 4 11 recalling 4 5 storing 4 4 VTR SETUP menu items related to digital processing A 42 items related to editing A 24 items related to operation panels A 20 items related to prerolling A 27 items related to recording protection A 28 items related to remote interface A 23 items related to the audio control A 39 items related to the hours meter A 15 items related to the pull down control A 44 items related to the time code A 29 items related to the video control A 34 items related to VTR operations A 16 other items A 46 W X Y Z Warning messages A 10 Index l 3 Joded popaAoa1 uo poyulig YaAVS daaq diag 1X3 THONVO N3JH49S WHV1V AJA HNIAA dnlas LIxX3 TANVd 3AVS ALSVd NVI Zdd 13S liv edd Ldd liv ldd NSISSV NOIL TIV JIUL Lasano 28 bd THQNV9 1 xa AdO 341A 19373S Aa MOHS dNlas MOHS advo quvo gt NOIL ATLL ALVINHOS AHONEN 1 xa AdO9 341a LIGA ANVE YLA STOA NUJU 1970 JO IDUASTX OY SHLOPUI A JO uo yo uo A A A Nid 0S Nid 6 dNL3S dNLAS NSISSV A A LOWY SLOWSY HLA TANVd 28ldd f auvo NYa Teller uo raal las AYOWSIN YLA dN LAS S y e e l Get yo ET eue nga naa Las SAV SAV
242. omatically increment by one each time Registering cue points by the numeric buttons 0 OO 3 9 0 o u OO J OO Der RES 1 53 PREU REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L_113min EOS 00 00 00 00 TCR 00 00 00 00 NERT seat de I AM CUE TITLE 1 PAGE 10 00 01 10 00 a gt S 12 00 03 10 00 4 4 210 5 210 5 10 210 TELE 7 10 FILE 8 10 CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR L__ es In PAGE mode the cue number advances only within the current page when the ENTRY button is pressed repeatedly For example after cue number 19 is registered and the ENTRY button is pressed the cue point 10 comes up as the next cue point In EXTEND mode if you press the ENTRY button after registering for example cue point No 99 the next cue point is registered to cue point No 99 again Registering cue points by the numeric buttons 1 Press the ALT button then the PAGE MODE button or the EXTEND MODE button PAGE button or NEXT PAGE button or use the numeric buttons to enter the page number in the data entry window then press the PAGE SET button 3 Press the A or M button to move the cursor P to the cue number to be registered If you selected PAGE mode press the PREV PREU REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L_113min EOS 00 00
243. onding to the angle of rotation of the search dial The playback speed is different depending on the frame frequency of the unit In this mode the search dial clicks at the positions for O still picture 10 and 10 times normal playback speed Frame frequency Playback speed 23 98 24 Hz Ranging from 60 to 60 25 Hz Ranging from 58 to 58 29 97 30 Hz Ranging from 50 to 50 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 1 1 S 0 U00 pue Sued JO suonouny pue suoneooq z 13 deyo NN O JUOD pue Sued JO SuOHOUNY pue suO e907 z Je deuD A 2 1 Control Panel Search dial Rotate to search for edit points Rotate the dial clockwise for forward playback the indicator lights up or counterclockwise for reverse playback the lt indicator lights up The W indicator lights up while the VTR is in stop mode Shuttle mode The playback speed is different depending on the frame frequency of the unit See item 9SHUTTLE button The dial clicks at the positions corresponding to 0 still picture 10 and 10 times normal playback speed Jog mode The playback speed corresponds to the rotational speed of the dial 1 to 1 or 2 to 2 times normal playback speed depending on the 107 JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR SETUP menu The dial does not click Variable speed playback mode Noiseless playback at 1 times normal speed when the dial is rotated fully counterclockwise and
244. operation using a device optional BKDW 509 on off connected to the PARALLEL I O 50P connector Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 61 oo on E MN sum s nusyy p 4ay deup Nhl 4 7 SET UP Menu Selecting remote operation mode When operating the VTR with an external device set the REMOTE 9 PIN button or REMOTE 50 PIN button to on When the REMOTE 9 PIN button is set to on You can operate the VTR with a device connected to the REMOTE1 IN QP OUT 9P connectors When the REMOTE 50 PIN button is set to on You can operate the VTR with a device optional BKDW 509 connected to the PARALLEL I O 50P connector When operating the VTR through an external device all of the tape operation and editing buttons are disabled with the exception of the STOP and EJECT buttons You may also set the VTR so that all buttons are enabled or disabled Perform this setting through 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE of the VTR SETUP menu You cannot however disable the menu and remote operation mode selection buttons 4 62 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 7 1 VTR SETUP Menu All menu items required for setting up the VTR operating conditions are displayed in the scrollable To activate the VTR SETUP menu Press the SET UP button then press the VTR VTR SETUP menu SETUP button Items which are frequently used can be registered
245. p frame mode In this mode drop frame mode processing is not performed Since there is no frame cutting a discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day in the case of a field frequency of 59 94 Hz 4 25 Chapter 4 Menu Settings ae i E WN sBullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu 4 3 6 Inserting VITC input source VITC Press the VITC button to select the VITC source to be written in the video signal AUX data area TCG Inserts values generated by the internal time code generator into the VITC V IN Inserts the VITC from the video input signal directly 4 3 7 Selecting CTL Display Mode TAPE TIMER Press the ALT button then the TAPE TIMER button to select a 12 hour or 24 hour clock for the CTL display 12H 12 hour clock 24H 24 hour clock 4 3 8 Presetting Pull Down Time Code PDPSET MENU when HKDV 507 507D is installed To preset the pull down time code when this VTR is operated in 23 98PsF 24PsF mode follow the steps below 2 Press the F2 PDPSET MENU key The PDPSET menu appears PRESET REMAIN T CH COND PDPSET MODE L 113min GREEN TCR 00 00 00 00 24F TC 00n OOn 00s OOF 00u OOn OO 00 PDTC DF NDF EAN C 5 Ol ain 28 8 a0 m O Ol 3 Press the PRESET MODE key to select 24F or 30F time code to be preset The selected time code is framed with th
246. panel display requesting confirmation of the formatting operation To cancel the formatting operation Press the CLR button 3 Press the FT FORMAT T Fil button while pressing down the SFT button COMPLETED appears in the control panel display Selecting the device to be used for TELE FILE menu operations With no cassette inserted press the ALT F5 T Fil MODE buttons to select the device 232C The device connected to the RS 232C connector on the VTR is used panel The VTR control panel is used Prohibiting TELE FILE menu operations Press the ALT WRITE PRTEC buttons on All TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited off All TELE FILE menu operations are permitted 4 43 Chapter 4 Menu Settings ia i Ga nN sbulyjas nuay p saldeyo HMI 4 4 CUE Menu Changing a title NO OO 0 9 0 O 0 OO Ol 4 Press the F7 SET LETTER button or the center cursor button The selected character is entered EDIT TITLE ABC DEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUUXYZ abcdefshijiklmnoparstuvuwxyz 0123456789110 lt gt x 7 7 5 H4R _ HDID2ZCAM 1 Press the ALT F3 ATTRIB EDIT buttons 2 Press the A or M button to select TITLE and then press the ENTRY button BACK SET SAUE SPACE SPACE LETTER EXIT LAC L_ 5
247. per control panel Lower control panel P ey iY xe r D Lom N r e O O Q gt Q T c gt O O gt O h U Q Q gt Q O o Menu operations section Memory card Search operations section insertion slot Editing operations section Tape transport operations section Control panel Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 1 g O4U0D pUe syed Jo SuoJOUN pue suol e007 z Je deyo WAI 2 1 Control Panel 2 1 1 Upper Control Panel DISPLAY FULL FINE button PHONES jack POWER switch PHONES level control PB level controls REC level controls Audio level meters OMONITOR SELECT button T E eee OIOO OOO E OooogL di Olndicator window INPUT SELECT button AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons REFERENCE signal indicators REMOTE buttons and RS 232C indicator Upper control panel DISPLAY FULL FINE button Changes the display range of the audio level meters FULL Display range is 60 to 0 dB peak level 0 dB or 40 to 20 dB peak level 20 dB Use 814 LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR SETUP menu to select the range FINE Displays the audio leve
248. play remaining time on the tape Use the 628 REMAIN TIME DISPLAY to display remaining time on the tape off Do not display remaining time 10min Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or less on Always display remaining time When remaining time is 23 minutes Tic R 2 3 5 9 4 0 4 8 R 2 3 When remaining time is five minutes T cIRI 213 5 9 lalo 1 8 JJ oO When remaining time is 100 minutes or over TIC RI 2 3 5 9 4 o 1 8 RI Examples of remaining time display Changing the superimpose position The superimpose position can be set to 16 different positions in the horizontal directions 0 15 and 24 different positions in the vertical directions 0 23 mj OO s O Ol 1 3 2 1 Press the ALT F7 CHARA H POS button to change the horizontal position and the CHARA V POS to change the vertical position The setting display part is lit 2 Use the lt and gt buttons to change the value The and buttons can also be used 3 Press the ALT CHARA H POS button or the CHARA V POS button The positions are set and the setting display disappears The positions are also set if another menu is selected 4 32 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 3 13 Setting the VI
249. r the STOP button flashes EXT SD Is lit when the video signal input to the REF IN SD connector is acting as the reference signal EXT HD Is lit when the video signal input to the REF IN HD connector is acting as the reference signal INPUT VIDEO Is lit when the video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI OPTION IN connector is acting as the reference signal REMOTE buttons and RS 232C indicator Press these buttons to select external equipment to be used to remotely control the VTR 1 9 pin Press to select the unit connected to the REMOTEI IN 9P OUT 9P connectors The button lights up 2 50 pin Press to select the unit connected to the PARALLEL I O 50P connector with optional BKDW 509 The button lights up RS 232C indicator Lights up when the VTR is communicating with the external equipment connected to the RS 232C connector When the VTR is being controlled by external equipment connected to the REMOTE1 IN 9P or PARALLEL I O SOP connector all tape transport buttons and edit operation buttons are disabled except the STOP and EJECT buttons You may also specify the disabling or enabling of all buttons by setting 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu 2 1 2 Lower Control Panel Menu Operations Section Menu display MEMORY CARD indicator Menu buttons ACCESS button DIGITAL O CASSETTE RECORDER HDW F500 ideo System
250. r bits are used for the sequence information to display 0 to 9 repeatedly MSB The first bit of the tens digit of the hour The second bit of the tens digit of the hour The first bit of the tens digit of the minute LSB The first bit of the tens digit of the second When the sequence information is masked the remaining contents of user s bits data are the same as the time code value before conversion 24F mode Since user s bits data multiplexed to the down converted output signal are updated frame by frame 24 frame time code and sequence information of the down converted output signal differs from those multiplexed to the HD output signal Time code area User s bits area HD 30F TC 24F TC sequence information 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A frame 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 01 00 80 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 80 80 01 00 00 00 02 40 00 00 01 Cycle of 00 00 00 02 40 00 80 02 CONES 00 00 00 03 40 80 00 02 00 00 00 03 40 80 80 03 00 00 00 04 80 00 00 03 00 00 00 04 80 00 80 03 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 A frame 00 00 00 05 00 00 80 04 Phase lock for the HD reference signal 23 98PsF and 525 black burst signal 59 941 mode When an optional HKDV 507D HD Pull Down Board is installed and item A05 PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE inthe VTR SETUP menu is set to lock1 or lock to lock the pull down output signal to the external reference signal the phase of the external reference s
251. r buttons are pressed To link the cursor gt with the cursor buttons Press the center cursor button Each press of the button alternately links and unlinks the cursor 2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the SFT button A new line is inserted above the line where the cursor P is located and the current time code is entered on the new line Moving a line Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Time data of the line to be moved Then press the or button Each press of the button moves the line up while each press of the button moves the line down If you perform the procedure above while the cursor is on any other data other than the Time data only the contents selected by the cursor will be moved To move the entire line be sure that the cursor is placed on the Time data Deleting a line Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the line to be deleted and then press the DEL POINT button while pressing down the SFT button The line is deleted and all proceeding lines move up by one Displaying other information saved to the memory label Press the TAPE INFO button The TAPE INFORMATION window appears showing other information concerning the videocassette CUE CH COND SCAN TELE FILE TCR 00 00 00 00 I ENTRY REC POINT TITO No ID 001234567 Ben 0 ADMIN Kanrisha hot COMMNT PPM MODEL HoUW 700 ho1 EDIT 2 SERIAL NUMB
252. r is usedas the reference signal for playback and audio signalrecording 007 SYNC PLAY off This is the mode for automatic correction atthe start of playback Insync play mode for example when playing back the VTR from apreroll point the IN pointis reached after exactly the preroll time has elapsed off Selects normal playback mode on Activates the sync play function for playback Insync play mode the time after the tape transport starts until the video and sound appear is longer than inthe normal playback mode 008 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE alldisable stop amp eject allenable local key map When this unitis used in remote control mode this selects which buttons on the control panel operate alldisable All switches and buttons are disabled stop amp eject Only the STOP and EJECT buttons operate allenable All switches and buttons except the RECORDER and PLAYER buttons are enabled local key map Only the buttons enabled in item 009 are operational Appendix A 1 7 xipueddy Menu List Item number 009 Item Seitable range Function LOCALKEY MAP Enables disables the buttons on this unit when itis in remote control mode Sub items STOP disable disable The STO
253. ration can continue even when the mark is flashing When the mark is flashing the warning message can be displayed by using the tip of a small pointed object Use the displayed warning information to eliminate the cause of the warning For more information about eliminating the cause of warning refer to the Maintenance Manual to press the MAINTENANCE switch The warning messages can be viewed in any menu To automatically display a warning message Whenever a warning occurs change item 120 WARNING DISPLAY in the VTR SETUP menu to on except the CUE or SET UP menu Only one message will be displayed even if there are multiple messages but a history of errors is kept in the To clear a warning message To cancel the display of a warning message refer to Clearing warning messages on page A 12 error log menu For more information about warning messages refer to the Maintenance Manual Warning mark ROM CH COND VER DIAGNOSTICS TCR 00 00 00 00 AINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY ERR LOG v OPERATION DRUM RUNNING TAPE TRAVEL 20H0URS H THRI H A WARNING 02 5S29HOURS 34HOURSI 26H LOST LOCK Warning message OPTION MAINTE INFO EXEC EXIT 01 02 03 04 08 09 10 11 14 15 16 17 1C 20 2D 34 3B 45 50 55 A NO EXTERNAL REFERENCE There is no reference signal on the selected REF INPUT connector
254. rd or backward respectively CE er PLAY LOCKED Fi 01y O4u 58s OOr 3 After making the modification release the ASSEM AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 10 00 OUT 00 02 10 00 respective edit point button that you have been Cor PLAYER holding down IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO me O1n 04n 58s OOF OUT button zaen aeaa a INS INS INS INS INS INS VIDEO A CH1 A CH2 A CH3 A CH4 CUE Moving an edit point position with the numeric Lett A a A a Cote buttons 4 Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT 1 button The modified time data for the edit point appears 5 0 OO aga in the menu display 42 3 Moving an edit point position with the numeric buttons T Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the CLR button Time data for the edit point appears in the data entry window Chapter 6 Editing 6 11 Bupa 913 dey9 HA 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing 6 1 10 Performing Automatic Editing Overview Once you have set the necessary edit points the AUTO button lights up to show that the VTR is ready for automatic editing During automatic editing the tape in the recorder VTR and the player VTR move as shown in the diagram below Insert editing Preroll point IN point OUT point Post roll point 4 M v 4 a a t Preroll Post roll i R Over Assemble editing r
255. rsor to the VTR memory bank number where the recalled data are to be stored Recalling a cue point list from a memory card replaces the current VTR cue point list with the recalled data FORMAT CH CONDI MEMORY CARD CARD Preset TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD y UTR BANK UNDO CARD BANKO SETUP BANK 5 BASEBALL 0 g FOOTBALL Preset 1 1 Preset Sanu Preset 2 2 TENNIS SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset TENNIS 4 4 Prese Preset 5 gt Eee VTR memory SHOW Preset 6 6 Prese c eser FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL bank number Preset 8 8 Preset L E Preset EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT as a e To change the current VTR menu settings Recalling a cue point list in a memory card Move the cursor P to C CURRENT SETUP 1 Press the SET UP button To replace all VTR memory bank contents The SET UP menu appears in the display with memory card data Press the F7 SELECT ALL button 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button 7 Press the F9 COPY button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly by pressing the ACCESS button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display 8 Press the COPY button while holding down p MEMORY CARD the SFT button pace pee TENNIS The VTR recalls the content
256. s Press to set AUDIO IN and OUT points during insert mode Press either AUDIO IN or OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button to set an audio edit point IN OUT buttons Press to set an IN or OUT point during editing Press either button while holding down the ENTRY button to set an edit point ENTRY button Press to enter an edit or cue point While holding down this button press either the AUDIO IN or OUT button or the IN or OUT button Cursor control buttons Press to move the cursor in the menu display Move the cursor as required to enter a value using the numeric buttons or to change a menu setting 2 8 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls AUTO button When this button is pressed it lights up and auto edit mode is activated INPUT CHECK button While you hold down this button the input signal is output from the monitor output connector so that you can monitor the input video and audio When the LTC VITC time code is shown on the display you can check the time code generator Note When the optional HKDV 501A HD SD Converter Board is installed in the unit and VTR SETUP menu item 776 DOWNCONVERTER INPUT CHECK ENABLE is set to enable you can monitor downconverter output When you press the INPUT CHECK button the input video and audio is output from all HD SD converter output connectors PLAYER RECORDER buttons Select which VTR is to be controlled by this VTR s
257. s are for the recorder or player In the following example the points enclosed in a box have been set manually and the AUDIO OUT point for the recorder VTR and the AUDIO IN and OUT points for the player VTR have been set automatically Note that whether set manually or automatically all edit points can be changed or deleted at any time AUDIO AUDIO IN point N point OUT point OUT point Recorder VTR Y 7 7 Y Player VTR A A A a AUDIO IN point AUDIO OUT point IN point OUT point Automatic split edit point setting Automatic setting of AUDIO OUT points When the sixth edit point AUDIO OUT point is set the edit point data is activated and the invalid AUDIO OUT points are automatically deleted Sixth edit point set AUDIO OUT point AUDIO s2 IN point IN point in OUT point Recorder VTR Y y M 4 Player VTR A A A A A AUDIO IN point ANDI OUT point IN point OU point AUDIO OUT point Edit point set automatically Automatic setting of edit points by correcting IN points When IN points are corrected the duration in the uncorrected VTR is used to automatically set OUT points and AUDIO IN OUT points AUDIO AUDIO IN point IN point OUT point OUT point Recorder VIR Y v v v Player VTR gt gt A A DI int
258. s of the memory card L y Brann After the recalling process is complete the title of UNPR ioe sesh rca ay rn et the memory bank of the memory card appears Preset 2 under the VTR indication SETUP aa reet Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset 9 CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Press the EXIT button a ia eee oer The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before EDIT SELECT DIRE copy ERET you pressed the ACCESS button appears again L gt 3 Press the F4 SHOW CUESET button The menu for storing cue point lists appears FORMAT MEMORY CARDI CARD CINEMA TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR BANK UNDO CUE POINT SETI CURRENT CUESET Esa TENNIS an Blank SHOU Blank 3 SETUP Blank 4 Blank 5 Blank 6 SHOW Blank 7 CUESET Blank 8 amp EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT CACC 4 1 0 Chapter 4 Menu Settings To return to the MEMORY CARD menu Press the F3 SHOW SETUP button again 4 Press the F8 DIRECTION button or press the or gt buttons twice to select the gt direction 5 Press the Al or M button to move the cursor P to the number of the memory bank in the memory card FORMAT MEMORY CARD CARD CINEMA TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR BANK UNDO CUE POINT SETI CURRENT CU
259. s run with tape threaded since last HOURS reset Use this information as a guide for head drum replacements resettable For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 H13 TAPE RUNNING Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback jog shuttle and HOURS variable speed modes since last reset Does not include stop and still modes Use resettable this information as a guide for replacing the fixed head and pinch rollers For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 H14 THREADING Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings since last reset COUNTER For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1 resettable A 15 Appendix xipueddy Menu List Items Related to VTR Operations 001 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number 001 Item PRE READ Settable range off audio video audio only video only Function Selects the pre read read before write mode for insert editing off No pre read operation audio video Carry out pre read editing for both audio and video audio only Carry out pre read editing for audio only video only Carry out pre read editing for video only 002 REC INHIBIT select off all crash REC video CTL audio CTL Selects the record inhibit mode off Recording is enabled The REC INHIBIT indicator does notlight all crash video audio Recording is inhibited onthe
260. set channels The REC INHIBIT indicator either lights or goes off The scope ofinhibiting recording is determined by menu item 003 003 REC INHIBIT AREAselect all crash REC video CTL audio CTL casst Selects the scope to which inhibiting recording applies all All recording is inhibited The REC INHIBIT indicator lights crash REC The normal recording mode is inhibited Use this setting when youwish to recordin assemble editing or insert editing only video CTL Recording of video and CTLis inhibited audio CTL Recording of audio and CTL is inhibited casst When the recording protection plug on the cassette is pushedin this setting is displayed This setting cannot be selected The REC INHIBIT indicator lights or flashes to indicate the state of the recording inhibit mechanism on the cassette For details see item 104 004 CAPSTANLOCK select 2FD 4FD When editing or playing back a tape with decoded componentsignals selectthe appropriate setting depending onyour purpose 2FD This setting locks the capstan servo in two field units This is the normal setting for editing or playing back HD or D1 signals 4LOCK The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 4 fields If color frames occur intermittently during playback the capstan servo is locked when the next color frame appears 4HOLD The capstan servo is locked to the color frame every 4 f
261. signals are factory set SET UP button Activates the SET UP menu Use the SET UP menu to restore settings to the VTR memory banks or IC memory card register functions to the PF1 2 menus and set items in the VTR SETUP menu For details see Chapter 4 Menu Settings on page 4 1 MEMORY CARD indicator Lights up when the memory card is inserted The indicator will flash when the memory card is improperly inserted or when the memory card battery is dead ACCESS button Press this button to directly activate the MEMORY CARD menu Flashes when the control panel is accessing the memory card Note Do not eject the memory card while the ACCESS button is flashing as this may damage the contents of the memory card 2 6 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Memory card insertion slot Insert memory cards here VTR settings can be stored on cards and used to configure the VTR and control panel at a later date thus reducing the time required for set up Press the button beside the insertion slot to eject the memory card Function buttons Activates the functions in each menu ALT alternative button Press to change the functions of the current menu Press again to return to the original functions MAINTENANCE switch Activates the MAINTENANCE menu To operate this switch push it in using the tip of a pen or some other pointed object while holding down the SFT button ALARM indi
262. splay the pull down time code TAPE CH COND ALTHTC TIMER GREEN 12H PLAY LOCK 2FD F1 PDPSET E Ou OOn 00s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 i p A CONU 20 00n OO 00s 00 DISP off CHARA CHARA CHARA VITC VITC SUPER H POS V POS POS 1 POS 2 off off 10 10 16 16 o x BS a D 4 29 Chapter 4 Menu Settings a Ba WU sBulljes nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu 4 3 12 Superimposition of Character Information PD CHARA CHARA SUPER H POS V POS To superimpose the characters representing time code data and operation mode information on the output signals use the PD CHARA and CHARA SUPER buttons Types of time data Symbol Meaning CTL CTL counter data TCR LTC reader time code data UBR LTC reader user bit data TCR VITC reader time code data UBR VITC reader user bit data TCG Time code data from the time code generator UBG User bit data from the time code generator Button Setting Connector to which the characters are superimposed ALT F4 on PULL DOWN OUT connector on two connectors ALT F6 on HD SDI MONITOR connector COMPOSITE SUPER connector of D CONV OUT OPTION 3 SUPER of connector D CONV SDI OUT OPTION Contents of superimposed data D Typ
263. t odd field field2 Freezes the second even field frame1 2 Freezes the firstand the subsequent second field frame2 1 Freezes the second field andthe subsequentfirst field Inthe case of freezing in playback modes other than normal playback the picture is frozen in frame mode only when dynamictracking is performing a frame operation The picture is frozed in field mode when dynamic tracking is not operating The frozed picture does not change even if you change this setting during freeze mode The change to this setting becomes effective the nexttime the VTR outputs a still picture When the stop freeze function is enabled regardless of the setting of this item the picture is frozen in frame mode only when dynamic tracking is performing a frame operation oris frozed in field mode when dynamic tracking is performing a field operation or when itis not operating 903 FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL momentary latch Determines the freeze operation control by button operations momentary The picture is frozen only while the button is helddown latch The picture is frozen when the button is pressed and remains frozen when the button is released The fozen picture is cancelled when the button is pressedagain Button operations e Freezing in odd or even first or second field is specified by item 902 Distinction between the first or second field follows the distinction in the reference
264. t sind Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdr cklich die Vervielfaltigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den Gebrauch derselben f r irgendeinen anderen Zweck als die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausr stung ohne ausdr ckliche schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation Sony Corporation Broadband Solutions Network Company Printed in Japan HDW F500 SYL 38 2001 09 13 3 203 128 04 1 http www world sony com 1999
265. teps 1 to 4 to change more settings 6 Press the SAVE EXIT button again The new settings are saved and the SETUP menu display appears again 4 7 2 PANEL SETUP Menu The PANEL SETUP menu is used to set the operation To activate the PANEL SETUP menu conditions of the upper and lower control panels Press the SET UP button then press the PANEL SETUP button REMAIN T CH COND PANEL SETUP KEYINH L 113min off KEY ALARM SCREEN BEEP BEEP SAVER EXIT off hish 10min PANEL SETUP menu display PANEL SETUP menu Button Indication Function Settings F1 KEYINH Disables all button operations on off F6 KEY BEEP Sets the keyboard sound high low off F7 ALARM BEEP Sets the alarm high low off F8 SCREEN SAVER _ Setsthescreen saver 3min 10min 60min off F10 EXIT Exits the PANEL SETUP menu Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 65 a i WN sum s nusyy p 4ay deup Nhl 4 7 SET UP Menu Disabling the upper and lower control panel buttons Set the KEYINH button to on You can select buttons to be disabled through 110 KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA in the VTR SETUP menu Setting the keyboard sound Press the KEY BEEP button repeatedly high The keyboard sound is loud low The keyboard sound is weak off The keyboard sound is off Setting the alarm Press t
266. terminal to pass throuth the unit and exit from an output terminal for input to a third piece of equipment Capstan A drive mechanism that moves the tape at a specified speed Its rotation is normally synchronized with a reference sync signal Color frame A color subcarrier phase having one cycle that consists of two frames four fields in the NTSC format Color frame locking A procedure in which the time code frame value is set to an odd number for the first and second color fields and to an even number for the third and fourth color fields Color framing A method to maintain color subcarrier phase continuity by performing editing in two frame units in order to achieve stable video without horizontal fluctuation at the edit points when editing downconverted composite video signal Component video signal A video signal that consists of a luminance signal Y and two chrominance color difference signals R Y B Y Composite video signal A signal that consists of video luminance and color sub carrier sync horizontal and vertical and color burst signals Condensation Moisture that collects on the head drum of the tape transport mechanism causing damage to the tape and malfunction of the VTR CTL Abbreviation for control signal A pulse signal that can be counted to determine the number of frames and therefore the tape s running time Used mainly for adjusting the tracking position of video heads
267. the numerical value Adjusting the master output level HD Make this adjustment with the MASTER LEVEL button 100 4000H an 0001413 kJ oo0t0 3dB Adjusting the Y output level HD Make this adjustment with the Y LEVEL button a 0001413 EJ oo0t0 3dB Adjusting the Ps output level HD Make this adjustment with the PB LEVEL button 100 4000H a 0001413 be t 3dB Adjusting the Pr output level HD Make this adjustment with the PR LEVEL button it 1007 4000H Win 00t01413 m 00f03dB Adjusting the setup level HD Make this adjustment with the SETUP LEVEL button f 0 0 wn 1000 100 10t0 10 Adjusting the sync phase HD Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of the VTR to the reference signal or when using a switcher or other device connected to another VTR to create special effects such as fading wrapping and dissolving To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to the reference input make this adjustment with the SYNC PHASE button P 00 ua 1280 127 1404H Fine adjustment of the sync phase HD Make this adjustment with the FINE button P 00 d Nin 001024 4b 0t0323nsec Adjusting the master output level D1 Make this adjustment with the ALT MASTER LEVEL buttons prst 100 4000H aN 0001413 zb oot0 3dB Adjusting the Y output level D1 Make this adjustment with
268. time code to 25 frame time code with 24F STARTING TC as the reference and the conversion done in both forward and reverse directions Note that the part of the 25 frame time code before 24F JUMPING TC is not consecutive with the part after 24F JUMPING TC Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 27 si ii S WN sBullles nueyy p Jeydeyo WA 4 3 TC Menu The table below shows an example of how the 25 frame time code is not consecutive when 24F STARTING TC is set to 01 00 00 00 and 24F JUMPING TC is set to 22 00 00 00 e JUMP TC SEL is set to 3H 24 Frames TC 25 Frames TC JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 20 09 36 00 01 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 Forward direction 01 00 01 00 01 00 00 24 STARTING TC 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 59 59 23 00 59 59 24 Reverse direction 22 00 00 01 22 07 12 01 Non consecutive JUMPING TC 22 00 00 00 21 09 36 00 Pa t 3 If necessary use the function buttons to change the settings For details on the settings made by these buttons see the table below TC CONVERT menu Button Indication Function F3 TC CONV Specifies whether the time code is converted to 25 frame time code or not F4 ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 24 frame time code is displayed or not on two lines in the HOME TC and PF menus along with the converted time code F6 START TC Press to preset the 24F PST STARTING TC using the numeric buttons F7
269. ting Up the VTR 3 7 YLA aul dn umes g sajdeyo NN HLA 34 dn Humes g saydeyo N 3 3 Handling Cassettes 3 3 1 Recommended Cassettes Use 2 inch HDCAM cassettes The maximum recording time is as shown in the following table System frequency HDCAM cassette 29 97 30 Hz 25 Hz 23 98 24 Hz S size cassette 40 minutes 48 minutes 50 minutes L size cassette 124 minutes 149 minutes 155 minutes Digital Betacam cassettes cannot be used Storage of cassettes Store your cassettes at room temperature and normal humidity 3 8 Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR 3 3 2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes Always turn on the VTR before attempting to insert or eject cassettes Inserting a cassette Inserting a cassette 1 Tur the POWER switch to ON 2 Before inserting a cassette check the following points e There is no slack in the tape e An error message does not appear in the menu display e The window of the cassette is facing up If there is any slack in the tape refer to Removing Slack in the tape on next page When inserting an S size cassette make sure it is aligned with the marks on the cassette insertion slot The cassette is loaded automatically and the tape is wound around the drum Removing slack in the tape Press one of the reels in slightly then carefully rotate it in the direction of the arrow until it stops
270. to the current VTR memory bank FORMAT CH COND MEMORY CARD CARD BASEBALL en TCR 00 00 00 00 MEMORY CARD gt UTR_BANK ARD BANKO SETUP BANK 2 2 BASEBALL O FOOTBALL 1_ Preset Bank number in the memory card Sigy Preset 2 SETUP Preset 3 3 Preset TENNIS 4 4 Preset Preset 5 5 Preset SHOW Preset 6 6 Preset CUESET FOOTBALL 7 7 FOOTBALL Preset 8 8 Preset C E Preset amp EDIT SELECT DIREC TITLE ALL Tron COPY EXIT CACC Io oo ogo o0 OO Ol 5391 4 6 Recalling the contents of an IC memory card 1 Press the SET UP button The SET UP menu appears in the display 2 Press the MEMORY CARD button The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly from anu menu screen by pressing the ACCESS button 5 To change the title of the memory bank press the EDIT TITLE button The title can be also be changed after the settings are recalled For details refer to 4 1 6 Adding Titles to the Data on page 4 11 Continued Chapter 4 Menu Settings 4 9 oo os ei MN sum s nusyy p 4ay deup Nhl 4 1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings 6 Press the l button to move the cursor gt to the Recalling acue point list from a memory VTR side then press the A or A button to move card the cu
271. ton and press ZERO button Selecting daylight saving time and normal time Hold down the SFT button and press SEASON button STANDARD normal time SUMMER daylight saving time one hour ahead of normal time Changing between normal and daylight saving times changes the current time by one hour Even if the change crosses midnight the current date is not changed A 1 2 Appendix Glossary AES EBU format A standard format for the transfer of digital audio signals In this format two audio signals can be input output through one XLR type connector Assemble editing An edit mode for adding new scenes to the end of previously recorded scenes New video signals are recorded for each control signal but continuity with the control signal preceding the edit point is maintained electrically Because assemble editing in the middle of a scene will cause a break in the video image at the end of the insertion this is not a practical method for inserting new video data This should be done with insert editing See also Insert editing Backspace editing Also called phase matching During backspace editing the VTR automatically rewinds the tape a few seconds after recording of a scene has been completed This allows the tape to attain a stable speed before the start of recording of the next scene thus maintaining signal continuity during editing Bridging connection A connection that allows a signal input to an input
272. ton to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up 3 To locate the edit points rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode For details on jog shuttle variable playback modes refer to 5 4 2 Variable Speed Playback on page 5 11 4 Press the IN OUT AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button while holding down the ENTRY button 5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to set the remaining edit points Chapter 6 Editing 6 5 Bupa 913 dey9 WAI 6 1 Basic Automatic Editing Setting edit points with the numeric buttons 4 Press the SET button to set the input data 3 CLR button 2 Setting edit points with the numeric buttons 1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME menu F4 INS TC INS VIDEO INS A CH1 INS A CH2 INS A CH3 INS A CH4 INS CUE 2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VTR for which edit points are to be set The button lights up oO Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons For example to enter 01HOOM30SOO0F press 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 The leading 0 is not required When the entered value is less than eight digits the leading digit s are set to 0 when you press the SET button CH COND HOME PB EE GREEN Input data PB PLAY LOCK are displayed 2FD Fil O1 y 04 58s OOF AIN 00 01 10 00 AOUT 00 02 10 00 IN 00 01 20 00 OUT 00 02 20 00 PLAYER A
273. tting 5 759 UD OUT D2 Item currently 6 760 CHROMA D2 ALT 7 711 761 HUE D2 registered to the PEZ 8 712 762 SETUP D2 9 713 763 SYNC NTSC button 10 714 764 FINE NTSC of SET SAUE BLANK PASTE CANCEL ExT a i E To unregister the selected item Press the SET BLANK button 5 Press the l button to move the cursor P to the PF1 amp 2 ASSIGN menu then press the Al or M button to move the cursor to the menu item to be registered to the function button To scroll the menu faster Press the A or M button while holding down the SFT button REMAIN T CH COND L_113min LC TCR 00 00 00 00 PF_ASSIGN MENU ALLE FIKEY SETUP ITEM 760 Vipeo WER 755 MASTER D1 E TN 2 005 756 Y LEVEL D1 PF ASSIGN 3 757 B Y LUL D1 PF2 SDI 4 708 758 R Y LUL D1 5 709 9 UD OUT Co LC 6 716 PUABARA Item to be ALT eel BT HUE CD 5 PF2 8 712 762 SETUP D2 registered to the 9 713 763 SYNC NTSC function n CL 10 714 764 FINE NTSC unction butto SET SAVE BLANK PASTE CANCEL EXIT ae ae E 6 Press the PASTE button to register the item The new item is registered to the function button T Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to register more items To cancel the registration of all new items Press the CANCEL button 8 Press the SAVE EXIT button to save the newly registered items The r
274. tton then the SET button SET appears in the data entry window PREV REMAIN T CH COND CUE PAGE L 113min Data entry EOS 00 00 00 00 TCR 00 00 00 00 window I AM CUE TITLE 1 NEXT PAGE PAGE y 3 4 5 6 TELE a FILE CUE PAGE CUENUM M CUE P ROLL SET SET CLEAR 5 Press the ENTRY button Data for the specified cue number are erased and the data column becomes blank Erased cue point PAGE SET CUENUM SET CC LJ To erase all cue point data Press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button A message asking you to confirm the operation appears in the display In EXTEND mode press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button again to erase all data for cue points No 0 to No 99 In PAGE mode press the CLR button while holding down the SFT button again to erase data for the cue points on the current page 4 4 4 Prerolling to a Cue Point Select the preroll time to a cue point with pressing the button You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1 second units Prerolling to a cue point oO QO oO oO oO QO O oO oO o Co 1 3 4 Prerolling to a cue point 1 Press the ALT button then the PAGE MODE button or the EXTEND MODE button 2 If you selected PAGE mode pr
275. u d lectrocution ne pas exposer cet appareil a la pluie ou a l humidite Afin d carter tour risque d lectrocution garder le coffret ferm Ne confier l entretien de l appareil qu un personnel qualifi CET APPAREIL DOIT TRE RELI LA TERRE Pour les clients europ ens Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme la fois la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC 89 336 CEE et la Directive sur les basses tensions 73 23 CEE mises par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europ ennes suivantes e EN60065 S curit des produits e EN55103 1 Interf rences lectromagn tiques mission e EN55103 2 Sensibilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans l environnement lectromagn tique suivant E4 environnement EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden darf das Gerat weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Geh use nicht ge ffnet werden berlassen Sie Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem Fachpersonal DIESES GER T MUSS GEERDET WERDEN F r Kunden in Europa Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE Kennzeichnung und erf llt sowohl die EMV Direktive 89 336 EEC als auch die Directive Niederspannung 73 23 EEC
276. uring DMC playback the tape runs as shown in the diagram below Speed variation end point Preroll time x initial speed IN point Tape runsat Playback mode initial speed using the memorized speed Playback at normal speed DMC playback 5 4 5 Playing Back Non audio Data Non audio data recorded on a tape is detected automatically and played back When non audio data is being played back e The OVER indication on the audio level meters flashes e Analog audio output to the main line monitor and the headphones are muted e The playback level cannot be adjusted using the PB audio output level controls 5 16 Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 4 6 Output of Pull Down Signal The explanation of pull down signal output for playback is given below Time code multiplexed to pull down signal output e The value of the time code multiplexed to pull down HD SDI output signal is determined by the time code preset using the PDPSET MENU in the TC menu and converted into 30 frame time code LTC output of this unit is always 24 frame time code which is output from the main output line of this unit e When this unit is operated in 24F mode time code data of the user s bits area is not included in the pull down signal output The time code value before conversion 24F mode and sequence information of conversion contained in user s bits data are multiplexed to the HD SDI output signal The following fou
277. uring a preview operation this selects the audio signals that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output connectors SSS SOUND SOUND SOUND In the editing interval the monitored signal is the player audio signal or audio input EE signal SMS SOUND MUTE SOUND In the editing interval the audio signal is muted A 26 Appendix Items Related to Prerolling 401 The values enclosed in a box are factory settings Item number Item Settable range Function 401 FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE UP stop still Selects the operation mode that the VTR changes to after completing a cue up operation stop Enters stop mode still Enters still picture mode search mode When setting the standard constant on the editor and control the unit set to stop 403 CUEUP BY TC capstan only reel capstan This setting is only active when item 602 is set to TC or UBIT capstan only The tape runs with the pinch ON during cue up The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape speed reel capstan The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during cue up When the tape nears the cue up point and tape speed drops to slow the pinch turns ON 404 CUEUP BY CTL capstan only reel capstan This setting is only active when item 602 is set to CTL capstan only The tape runs with the pinch ON state during cue up The maximum tape speed is ten times normal
278. uring slow motion playback Note that this function does not work when this VTR is operated in PsF mode HKDV 503 HD Digital Video Controller This allows you to remotely control the parameters for video signals and image enhancement HKDV 506A SDTI Board This board allows the input and output of special non degrading SDTI 270Mbps signals 1 SDTI Serial Data Transport Interface SDTI is defined as SMPTE 305M HKDV 507 507D HD Pull Down Board This board allows the output of 2 3 pull down HD signal of 59 941 or 60i mode when this unit is operated with the frame frequency of 23 98 or 24 Hz The 2 3 pull down sequence is as follows folie Pollo oe hobebo bebo te The 2 3 pull down sequence is guaranteed only when this VTR is in normal play mode References In addition to this Operation Manual the following manuals are available e Maintenance Manual Part 1 Provides information necessary for users to maintain the VTR e Maintenance Manual Part 2 sold separately Provides additional information to fully maintain the HDW F500 Contains details on electrical adjustments circuit diagrams and other items Chapter 1 Overview 1 5 2 1 Control Panel The control panel consists of the following sections memory card insertion slot editing operations e Upper control panel section tape transport operations section and search e Lower control panel menu operations section operations section Up
279. utton in the TC menu int LTC int VITC ext LTC ext VITC see page 4 25 TCG MODE button in the TC menu regene prst auto see page 4 25 Setting switches and menus Chapter 5 Recording Playback 5 1 O gt rmp D Ol JJ D O 2 2 Q a lt oO O yoeghe q Bulpioo9y G JejdeyD 5 1 Preparing for Recording 5 1 2 Selecting Audio Signals This section describes how to select the audio signals for input and monitoring Selecting the audio input signals Press the AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select the audio input signal and channels Selecting the audio input signals 1 Press the INPUT SELECT button so that it lights up The AUDIO INPUT MONITOR SELECT button s light s up to indicate the audio input signal type and the currently selected audio channel 2 Select the signals to be input and the channels by pressing the following buttons e HD SDI CH 1 to CH 4 buttons Select audio input through HD SDI INPUT connector Channels 1 through 4 e AES EBU CH 1 to CH 4 buttons Select audio channels 1 to 4 input through the AUDIO INPUT AES EBU connectors e ANALOG CH 1 to CH 4 buttons Select audio channels 1 to 4 through the AUDIO INPUT connectors This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP menu using items 802 AUDIO INPUT SELECT
280. y the user bits generator are recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data recorded in the video signal AUX data area on the tape ext LTC The time code value generated by the time code generator and the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data input from the TIME CODE IN connector ext VITC The time code value generated by the time code generator and the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are recorded The time code generator and the user bits generator lock to the time data input from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI OPTION IN connector auto regene int LTC is set in assemble or insert mode and prst is set in other modes 1 The SDTI OPTION IN connector is operative only when the optional HKDV 506A SDTI Board is installed and 701 VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP menu is set to SDTI 2 xw The DF NDF setting on the button is applied to the time code only when prst is specified by the button the DF NDF setting is always applied for the CTL timer 4 22 Chapter 4 Menu Settings 3 Specify the signal to be regenerated with 608 TCG UBG REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP menu Signals not specified by this menu item are automatically set to Preset mode regardless of the button setting Setting time codes To set time codes s
281. yback the LTC output is so small that it may not be read correctly depending on the playback speed See also VITC A 13 Appendix xipueddy Glossary Non drop frame mode In this mode drop frame mode processing is not performed Since there is no frame cutting a discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day in the case of a field frequency of 59 94 Hz which causes problems when editing programs in units of seconds using the number of frames as a refernce See also Drop frame mode Preroll The rewinding of a video tape in the player or recorder VTR by a certain length before an edit point allowing the tape to attain a stable speed at the edit point and synchronization with the other video tape during editing Reference video signal A video signal containing a sync signal or sync and burst signal used as a reference for synchronizing video equipment Servolocking The locking of the phase and speed of a VTR s head drum rotation and tape transport to a reference signal during recording and playback Standby off mode A mode in which head drum rotation is stopped and tape tension is released and thus the VTR is not ready for immediate recording and playback This mode alleviates the tape and video heads from wear or damage Standby on mode A mode in which the head drum rotates with the tape wrapped around it and thus the VTR is ready for immediate recording or playback The VTR enters standby off

1 - All Mobile Video

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents